8. 随念业处之分别显示巴利原文
8. Anussatikammaṭṭhānaniddeso
死随念论显示巴利原文
Maraṇassatikathā
167 接下来,我们要讲的是紧接着的死随念修习方法。这里说的“死”,指的是在一个生命期里命根彻底断绝。不过,像阿罗汉们断除轮回之苦的那种死,或者一切事物刹那坏灭的那种死,还有我们平常说“树死了”“铜死了”那种死,并不是这里要讨论的。显示巴利原文
Idāni ito anantarāya maraṇassatiyā bhāvanāniddeso anuppatto. Tattha nti ekabhavapariyāpannassa jīvitindriyassa upacchedo. Yaṃ panetaṃ arahantānaṃ vaṭṭadukkhasamucchedasaṅkhātaṃ saṅkhārānaṃ khaṇabhaṅgasaṅkhātaṃ rukkho mato lohaṃ matantiādīsu na taṃ idha adhippetaṃ.
这里要讨论的死,分为两种:一种是时节死,另一种是非时节死。时节死,是由于福报耗尽、或寿命耗尽、或两者同时耗尽而产生的。非时节死,则是由于能中断生命的业力成熟而产生的。显示巴利原文
Yampi cetaṃ adhippetaṃ, taṃ kālamaraṇaṃ akālamaraṇanti duvidhaṃ hoti. Tattha kālamaraṇaṃ puññakkhayena vā āyukkhayena vā ubhayakkhayena vā hoti. Akālamaraṇaṃ kammupacchedakakammavasena.
具体来说,即使维持寿命延续的各种条件都具足了,但仅仅因为产生这一期生命的业力果报已经耗尽而导致的死亡,就叫作“福尽死”。由于生存环境、气候、食物等条件不具足,就像现在这个时代的人一般活到百岁左右,因为寿命的期限到了而死亡,就叫作“寿尽死”。至于像度使魔和迦蓝浮王那样,在那一刹那被能令他们当下死去的业力中断了生命延续,或者由于过去业力的缘故,被刀剑等外力伤害而中断生命延续的死亡,就叫作“非时节死”。所有这些死,都包含在前面所说的命根断绝这个范畴里。因此,忆念这种叫作命根断绝的死,就是“死随念”。显示巴利原文
Tattha yaṃ vijjamānāyapi āyusantānajanakapaccayasampattiyā kevalaṃ paṭisandhijanakassa kammassa vipakkavipākattā maraṇaṃ hoti, idaṃ nāma. Yaṃ gatikālāhārādisampattiyā abhāvena ajjatanakālapurisānaṃ viya vassasatamattaparimāṇassa āyuno khayavasena maraṇaṃ hoti, idaṃ nāma. Yaṃ pana dūsīmārakalāburājādīnaṃ viya taṅkhaṇaññeva ṭhānācāvanasamatthena kammunā upacchinnasantānānaṃ, purimakammavasena vā satthaharaṇādīhi upakkamehi upacchijjamānasantānānaṃ maraṇaṃ hoti, idaṃ nāma. Taṃ sabbampi vuttappakārena jīvitindriyupacchedena saṅgahitaṃ. Iti jīvitindriyupacchedasaṅkhātassa maraṇassa saraṇaṃ maraṇassati.
168 想要修习死随念的人,应该独自隐居,用“死亡一定会发生,命根将会断绝”这样的想法,或者用“死、死”这个词来如理作意。因为如果不如理作意,就会出现各种问题:忆念自己喜欢的人的死时,会生起忧愁,就像母亲忆念死去的爱子一样;忆念自己讨厌的人的死时,会生起欢喜,就像仇人忆念敌人的死一样;忆念与自己无关的人的死时,不会产生悚惧感,就像烧尸的人看到尸体一样麻木;忆念自己的死时,会生起恐怖,就像胆小的人看见有人举刀要杀他一样。在这些情况下,都没有建立起正念、悚惧感和智慧。所以,修行者应该到处观察那些被杀或已经死去的有情,并对过去曾经见过、享受过各种成就而现在都已经死去的那些有情的死进行作意;当心与正念、悚惧感和智慧相应之后,就可以用“死亡将会发生”等方式来作意了。这样作意,就是如理作意,意思是用正确的方法来作意。如果有人能这样修习,各种盖障就会被镇伏,以死亡为所缘的正念就能稳固地建立起来,这个业处就能达到近行定。显示巴利原文
Taṃ bhāvetukāmena rahogatena paṭisallīnena ‘‘maraṇaṃ bhavissati, jīvitindriyaṃ upacchijjissatī’’ti vā, ‘‘maraṇaṃ maraṇa’’nti vā yoniso manasikāro pavattetabbo. Ayoniso pavattayato hi iṭṭhajanamaraṇānussaraṇe soko uppajjati vijātamātuyā piyaputtamaraṇānussaraṇe viya. Aniṭṭhajanamaraṇānussaraṇe pāmojjaṃ uppajjati verīnaṃ verimaraṇānussaraṇe viya. Majjhattajanamaraṇānussaraṇe saṃvego na uppajjati matakaḷevaradassane chavaḍāhakassa viya. Attano maraṇānussaraṇe santāso uppajjati ukkhittāsikaṃ vadhakaṃ disvā bhīrukajātikassa viya. Tadetaṃ sabbampi satisaṃvegañāṇavirahato hoti. Tasmā tattha tattha hatamatasatte oloketvā diṭṭhapubbasampattīnaṃ sattānaṃ matānaṃ maraṇaṃ āvajjetvā satiñca saṃvegañca ñāṇañca yojetvā ‘‘maraṇaṃ bhavissatī’’tiādinā nayena manasikāro pavattetabbo. Evaṃ pavattento hi yoniso pavatteti, upāyena pavattetīti attho. Evaṃ pavattayatoyeva hi ekaccassa nīvaraṇāni vikkhambhanti, maraṇārammaṇā sati saṇṭhāti, upacārappattameva kammaṭṭhānaṃ hoti.
169 但是,如果这样修习还未能成就的人,应该用以下八种方式来忆念死亡:把死亡看作像杀人者就在眼前一样、从成就的衰败来看、通过比较来看、从身体被许多因素共同拥有来看、从寿命的脆弱来看、从死亡没有固定征兆来看、从生命期限的限定来看、从生命只在刹那间的短暂来看。显示巴利原文
Yassa pana ettāvatā na hoti, tena vadhakapaccupaṭṭhānato, sampattivipattito, upasaṃharaṇato, kāyabahusādhāraṇato, āyudubbalato, animittato, addhānaparicchedato, khaṇaparittatoti imehi aṭṭhahākārehi maraṇaṃ anussaritabbaṃ.
这里,“以杀戮者现前”的意思是,把死亡想象成就像有一个杀人者就站在面前。比如一个杀人者拿着剑,心想“我要砍下这个人的头”,把剑架在脖子上,他就是现前的;同样,死亡也确实是一直现前的,应该这样来忆念。为什么呢?因为死亡是与生一起来的,并且会夺走生命。就像刚长出来的蘑菇总是顶着泥土冒出来一样,有情也是与老、死一起出生的。因为他们的结生心在生起之后,马上就趋向衰老,并与相应的各蕴一同坏灭,就像从山顶滚落的石头一样。所以,首先,刹那死是与生俱来的;而凡是已经出生的,必定会死,所以这里所讨论的死也是与生俱来的。因此,这个有情从出生那一刻起,就像升起的太阳一直朝着落下的方向运行,无论到了哪里,都片刻不会倒退;又像山间的急流以迅猛的水势奔流冲去,片刻不会倒退;同样,这个有情片刻不会倒退,只是一直朝着死亡走去。所以这么说:显示巴利原文
Tattha ti vadhakassa viya paccupaṭṭhānato. Yathā hi imassa sīsaṃ chindissāmīti asiṃ gahetvā gīvāya cārayamāno vadhako paccupaṭṭhitova hoti, evaṃ maraṇampi paccupaṭṭhitamevāti anussaritabbaṃ. Kasmā? Saha jātiyā āgatato, jīvitaharaṇato ca. Yathā hi ahicchattakamakuḷaṃ matthakena paṃsuṃ gahetvāva uggacchati, evaṃ sattā jarāmaraṇaṃ gahetvāva nibbattanti. Tathā hi nesaṃ paṭisandhicittaṃ uppādānantarameva jaraṃ patvā pabbatasikharato patitasilā viya bhijjati saddhiṃ sampayuttakhandhehi. Evaṃ khaṇikamaraṇaṃ tāva saha jātiyā āgataṃ. Jātassa pana avassaṃ maraṇato idhādhippetamaraṇampi saha jātiyā āgataṃ. Tasmā esa satto jātakālato paṭṭhāya yathā nāma uṭṭhito sūriyo atthābhimukho gacchateva, gatagataṭṭhānato īsakampi na nivattati. Yathā vā nadī pabbateyyā sīghasotā hārahārinī sandateva vattateva īsakampi na nivattati, evaṃ īsakampi anivattamāno maraṇābhimukhova yāti. Tena vuttaṃ –
「人最初一夜,
住在母胎中;
他便向前去,
行而不复返。」
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yamekarattiṃ paṭhamaṃ, gabbhe vasati māṇavo; Abbhuṭṭhitova so yāti, sa gacchaṃ na nivattatī’’ti. (jā. 1.15.363);
当他这样继续前行时,死亡离他其实已经很近了。就像被夏天的酷热逼迫的小河,水渐渐干涸;就像清晨的果实,汁液一到达蒂结处,就快要从树上掉下来;就像被槌子敲打的陶器,马上就要碎裂;就像被阳光照到的露珠,转眼就要消散。所以这样说——显示巴利原文
Evaṃ gacchato cassa gimhābhitattānaṃ kunnadīnaṃ khayo viya, pāto āporasānugatabandhanānaṃ dumapphalānaṃ patanaṃ viya, muggarābhitāḷitānaṃ mattikabhājanānaṃ bhedo viya, sūriyarasmisamphuṭṭhānaṃ ussāvabindūnaṃ viddhaṃsanaṃ viya ca maraṇameva āsannaṃ hoti. Tenāha –
「昼夜流逝,生命渐减;
凡人的寿量终将耗尽,
犹如水少溪流中的水池。」
「凡人的寿命耗尽,
犹如小河的流水。」(相应部1.146)
「犹如成熟的果实,
清晨有坠落的恐怖;
如是已生的凡人,
常有死亡的恐怖。」
「犹如陶匠所造的泥土器皿;
小的与大的,已烧与未烧的;
一切皆以破裂为终,诸有情的生命也是如此。」
「犹如草尖朝露,日出即灭;
人们的寿命亦然。母亲勿阻我出家!」
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Accayanti ahorattā, jīvitamuparujjhati; Āyu khīyati maccānaṃ, kunnadīnaṃva odakaṃ. (saṃ. ni. 1.146); ‘‘Phalānamiva pakkānaṃ, pāto papatato bhayaṃ; Evaṃ jātāna maccānaṃ, niccaṃ maraṇato bhayaṃ. ‘‘Yathāpi kumbhakārassa, kataṃ mattikabhājanaṃ; Khuddakañca mahantañca, yaṃ pakkaṃ yañca āmakaṃ; Sabbaṃ bhedanapariyantaṃ, evaṃ maccāna jīvitaṃ’. (su. ni. 581-582); ‘‘Ussāvova tiṇaggamhi, sūriyuggamanaṃ pati; Evamāyu manussānaṃ, mā maṃ amma nivārayā’’ti. (jā. 1.11.79);
这样看来,这个与生俱来的死亡,就像一个高举利剑的杀人者。它就像把剑架在脖子上的杀人者一样,只会夺走生命,绝不会空手而退。所以,因为死亡与生俱来,又因为它必定夺命,死亡就以高举利剑的杀人者这个形象现起。应当这样以“杀人者之相”来忆念死。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ ukkhittāsiko vadhako viya saha jātiyā āgataṃ panetaṃ maraṇaṃ gīvāya asiṃ cārayamāno so vadhako viya jīvitaṃ haratiyeva, na aharitvā nivattati. Tasmā saha jātiyā āgatato, jīvitaharaṇato ca ukkhittāsiko vadhako viya maraṇampi paccupaṭṭhitamevāti evaṃ vadhakapaccupaṭṭhānato maraṇaṃ anussaritabbaṃ.
170 在这里,所谓的成就,只会在没有被衰败压倒之前才显得辉煌;没有任何成功能超越衰败而长久存在。正如——显示巴利原文
ti idha sampatti nāma tāvadeva sobhati, yāva naṃ vipatti nābhibhavati, na ca sā sampatti nāma atthi, yā vipattiṃ atikkamma tiṭṭheyya. Tathā hi –
「享有整个大地,
到最后,其主宰者地位,
竟只剩半个庵摩罗果大。
「即以此身,当福业灭尽时;
面临死亡,无忧者也陷入忧愁。」
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Sakalaṃ mediniṃ bhutvā, datvā koṭisataṃ sukhī; Aḍḍhāmalakamattassa, ante issarataṃ gato. ‘‘Teneva dehabandhena, puññamhi khayamāgate; Maraṇābhimukho sopi, asoko sokamāgato’’ti.
再者,一切健康以疾病为终结,一切年轻以衰老为终结,一切生命以死亡为终结。整个世间的众生,都被生所追随,被老所逼迫,被病所征服,被死所击倒。所以这样说——显示巴利原文
Apica sabbaṃ ārogyaṃ byādhipariyosānaṃ, sabbaṃ yobbanaṃ jarāpariyosānaṃ, sabbaṃ jīvitaṃ maraṇapariyosānaṃ, sabboyeva lokasannivāso jātiyā anugato, jarāya anusaṭo, byādhinā abhibhūto, maraṇena abbhāhato. Tenāha –
「犹如广大的岩石,触及天空的山岳,
从四方逼来,碾碎一切。
「如是老与死,压倒诸有情;
刹帝利、婆罗门、吠舍,首陀罗、旃陀罗与补羯娑;
它不回避任何人,碾碎一切。
在那里,没有象军的地盘,没有车兵的地盘,也没有步兵的地盘;
也不能以咒术战或财富来战胜。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yathāpi selā vipulā, nabhaṃ āhacca pabbatā; Samantā anupariyeyyuṃ, nippothentā catuddisā. ‘‘Evaṃ jarā ca maccu ca, adhivattanti pāṇine; Khattiye brāhmaṇe vesse, sudde caṇḍālapukkuse; Na kiñci parivajjeti, sabbamevābhimaddati. ‘‘Na tattha hatthīnaṃ bhūmi, na rathānaṃ na pattiyā; Na cāpi mantayuddhena, sakkā jetuṃ dhanena vā’’ti. (saṃ. ni. 1.136);
这样,辨明生命的成就最终都归于死亡的败坏,应当从成就与败坏这个方面来忆念死。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ jīvitasampattiyā maraṇavipattipariyosānataṃ vavatthapentena sampattivipattito maraṇaṃ anussaritabbaṃ.
171 (三)以比较——这是通过与他人比较自己来忆念。在这里,应当通过七种方式的比较来忆念死亡:从名声之大、从福德之大、从力量之大、从神力之大、从慧之大、从辟支佛、从正自觉者。怎样比较呢?这个叫做死亡的东西,确实已经毫无疑虑地降临在大名声者、大眷属者、具足财富车乘者、大选出王、曼陀多王、大善见王、坚辐王、尼弥王等诸王之上,难道不会降临在我身上吗?显示巴利原文
ti parehi saddhiṃ attano upasaṃharaṇato. Tattha sattahākārehi upasaṃharaṇato maraṇaṃ anussaritabbaṃ, yasamahattato, puññamahattato, thāmamahattato, iddhimahattato, paññāmahattato, paccekabuddhato, sammāsambuddhatoti. Kathaṃ? Idaṃ maraṇaṃ nāma mahāyasānaṃ mahāparivārānaṃ sampannadhanavāhanānaṃ mahāsammatamandhātumahāsudassana daḷhanemi nimippabhutīnampi upari nirāsaṅkameva patitaṃ, kimaṅgaṃ pana mayhaṃ upari na patissati?
大名声的诸胜王,大选出王等,
他们也都为死所制服,
如我这等人,
更有何言说。
显示巴利原文 Mahāyasā rājavarā, mahāsammataādayo; Tepi maccuvasaṃ pattā, mādisesu kathāva kāti.
如是先以大名声比较而忆念死。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ tāva anussaritabbaṃ.
如何以大福来比较呢?显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ puññamahattato?
光耀、结发者、郁伽、文荼,以及富那迦;
这些人及世间其他以大福著称者,
一切皆已归于死,况我这样的人,更何足论?
显示巴利原文 Jotiko jaṭilo uggo, meṇḍako atha puṇṇako; Ete caññe ca ye loke, mahāpuññāti vissutā; Sabbe maraṇamāpannā, mādisesu kathāva kāti.
应如是忆念。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ anussaritabbaṃ.
如何以大力来比较呢?显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ thāmamahattato?
婆苏提婆、巴拉提婆、毗摩塞那、优地提罗;
查奴罗,那位大末罗,也都落入死王的支配。
他们如此具足体力与威力,在世间如此著名;
他们也都已走向死亡,像我这样的人,还有什么可说的呢?
显示巴利原文 Vāsudevo baladevo, bhīmaseno yudhiṭṭhilo; Cānuro yo mahāmallo, antakassa vasaṃ gatā. Evaṃ thāmabalūpetā, iti lokamhi vissutā; Etepi maraṇaṃ yātā, mādisesu kathāva kāti.
应如此随念。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ anussaritabbaṃ.
如何以大神力比较而念死?显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ iddhimahattato?
仅以足拇趾,便震动了韦迦亚塔;
那位神力者中最胜者、第二位上首弟子,
他也进入了恐怖的死之口,如鹿入狮子口;
具足神通而入灭,如我这等人,更有何言说?
显示巴利原文 Pādaṅguṭṭhakamattena , vejayantamakampayi; Yo nāmiddhimataṃ seṭṭho, dutiyo aggasāvako. Sopi maccumukhaṃ ghoraṃ, migo sīhamukhaṃ viya; Paviṭṭho saha iddhīhi, mādisesu kathāva kāti.
应如是忆念。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ anussaritabbaṃ.
如何从慧之广大来忆念?显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ paññāmahattato?
除世间怙主之外,
凡其余一切有情;
以慧而论,皆不及舍利弗十六分之一。
如此大慧者,
第一上首弟子;
已落入死亡掌控,像我这样的人,更有什么可说呢?
显示巴利原文 Lokanāthaṃ ṭhapetvāna, ye caññe atthi pāṇino; Paññāya sāriputtassa, kalaṃ nāgghanti soḷasiṃ. Evaṃ nāma mahāpañño, paṭhamo aggasāvako; Maraṇassa vasaṃ patto, mādisesu kathāva kāti.
应当这样来随念。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ anussaritabbaṃ.
怎样以辟支佛来比较而念死呢?那些辟支佛,凭着自己的智慧和精进力,摧毁了一切烦恼敌,证得了辟支菩提,像犀牛角一样独自修行、自觉自悟。连他们都不能脱离死亡,像我这样的人,又怎么可能脱离呢?显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ paccekabuddhato? Yepi te attano ñāṇavīriyabalena sabbakilesasattunimmathanaṃ katvā paccekabodhiṃ pattā khaggavisāṇakappā sayambhuno, tepi maraṇato na muttā, kuto panāhaṃ muccissāmīti.
依各种相而观察的诸大仙,
以自觉智慧的威力,已达漏尽者,
独行独住,犹如犀牛角;
他们尚且不能超越死亡,像我这样的人,还有什么可说的呢?
显示巴利原文 Taṃ taṃ nimittamāgamma, vīmaṃsantā mahesayo; Sayambhuññāṇatejena, ye pattā āsavakkhayaṃ. Ekacariyanivāsena, khaggasiṅgasamūpamā; Tepi nātigatā maccuṃ, mādisesu kathāva kāti.
应当如此随念。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ anussaritabbaṃ.
怎样从正自觉者(佛陀)方面来随念死亡呢?那位世尊,他的色身以八十随形好为庄严、以三十二大人相为妙饰,他的法身具足一切方面都清净的戒蕴等功德宝,已经到达名声之大、福德之大、力量之大、神通之大、智慧之大的彼岸,是无等、无等等、无比、无双的阿罗汉、正自觉者。即便如此,他也像被雨水降下而熄灭的大火堆一样,被死亡之雨降下而即刻寂灭了。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ sammāsambuddhato? Yopi so bhagavā asītianubyañjanapaṭimaṇḍitadvattiṃsamahāpurisalakkhaṇavicitrarūpakāyo sabbākāraparisuddhasīlakkhandhādiguṇaratanasamiddhadhammakāyo yasamahattapuññamahattathāmamahattaiddhimahattapaññāmahattānaṃ pāraṃ gato asamo asamasamo appaṭipuggalo arahaṃ sammāsambuddho, sopi salilavuṭṭhinipātena mahāaggikkhandho viya maraṇavuṭṭhinipātena ṭhānaso vūpasanto.
如此大神力的大仙,竟也有这死亡;
死亡不因畏惧,不因惭耻,而受其支配。
它无耻、无畏,粉碎一切有情;
它怎能不征服像我这样的有情呢?
显示巴利原文 Evaṃ mahānubhāvassa, yaṃ nāmetaṃ mahesino; Na bhayena na lajjāya, maraṇaṃ vasamāgataṃ. Nillajjaṃ vītasārajjaṃ, sabbasattābhimaddanaṃ; Tayidaṃ mādisaṃ sattaṃ, kathaṃ nābhibhavissatīti.
应当如此随念。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ anussaritabbaṃ.
他这样以死亡的共同性,将自己与那些具足大名声等殊胜的人相比较,忆念说:'如同那些殊胜的有情一样,我也必定会死。'这样随念死亡的人,他的业处便达到近行定。应当这样以比较而念死。显示巴利原文
Tassevaṃ yasamahattatādisampannehi parehi saddhiṃ maraṇasāmaññatāya attānaṃ upasaṃharitvā tesaṃ viya sattavisesānaṃ mayhampi maraṇaṃ bhavissatīti anussarato upacārappattaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ hotīti. Evaṃ upasaṃharaṇato maraṇaṃ anussaritabbaṃ.
172 (四)'以身多共同者'来念死——这个身体是许多众生共同的。首先,它是八十种虫族的共同住处。在这里,依皮而住的虫啃食皮,依内皮而住的啃食内皮,依肉而住的啃食肉,依腱而住的啃食腱,依骨而住的啃食骨,依髓而住的啃食髓。它们就在那里出生、衰老、死亡,并排泄大小便。这身体就是它们的产房、病房、坟墓、厕所和尿桶。而且,这个身体也会因为那些虫族的扰乱而导致死亡。如同是八十种虫族的共同住处一样,它也是内在的数百种疾病,以及外在的蛇、蝎等死亡之缘的共同目标。显示巴利原文
ti ayaṃ kāyo bahusādhāraṇo. Asītiyā tāva kimikulānaṃ sādhāraṇo, tattha chavinissitā pāṇā chaviṃ khādanti, cammanissitā cammaṃ khādanti, maṃsanissitā maṃsaṃ khādanti, nhārunissitā nhāruṃ khādanti, aṭṭhinissitā aṭṭhiṃ khādanti, miñjanissitā miñjaṃ khādanti. Tattheva jāyanti jīyanti mīyanti, uccārapassāvaṃ karonti. Kāyova nesaṃ sūtigharañceva gilānasālā ca susānañca vaccakuṭi ca passāvadoṇikā ca. Svāyaṃ tesampi kimikulānaṃ pakopena maraṇaṃ nigacchatiyeva. Yathā ca asītiyā kimikulānaṃ, evaṃ ajjhattikānaṃyeva anekasatānaṃ rogānaṃ bāhirānañca ahivicchikādīnaṃ maraṇassa paccayānaṃ sādhāraṇo.
譬如放在四衢道口的靶子,从一切方向射来的箭、矛、标枪、石块等都落在上面;同样,一切灾祸也落在这身体上。而这身体,也必然因为那些灾祸的降临而走向死亡。因此世尊说:'诸比丘!在这里,有比丘在白昼过去、夜晚来临时,这样思惟:我实在有许多死亡之因——蛇可能咬我,蝎可能螫我,蜈蚣可能咬我,这些都能使我命终,所以都是我的危难;或者我可能绊倒而跌落;或者我所吃的饭食不消化;或者我的胆汁可能紊乱;或者我的痰可能紊乱;或者我的刀风可能紊乱,这些都能使我命终,所以都是我的危难。'应当这样以'身多共同者'而忆念死亡。显示巴利原文
Yathā hi catumahāpathe ṭhapite lakkhamhi sabbadisāhi āgatā sarasattitomarapāsāṇādayo nipatanti, evaṃ kāyepi sabbupaddavā nipatanti . Svāyaṃ tesampi upaddavānaṃ nipātena maraṇaṃ nigacchatiyeva. Tenāha bhagavā – ‘‘idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu divase nikkhante rattiyā paṭihitāya iti paṭisañcikkhati, bahukā kho me paccayā maraṇassa, ahi vā maṃ ḍaṃseyya, vicchiko vā maṃ ḍaṃseyya, satapadī vā maṃ ḍaṃseyya, tena me assa kālaṅkiriyā, so mamassa antarāyo, upakkhalitvā vā papateyyaṃ, bhattaṃ vā me bhuttaṃ byāpajjeyya, pittaṃ vā me kuppeyya, semhaṃ vā me kuppeyya, satthakā vā me vātā kuppeyyuṃ, tena me assa kālaṅkiriyā, so mamassa antarāyo’’ti. Evaṃ (a. ni. 6.20) kāyabahusādhāraṇato maraṇaṃ anussaritabbaṃ.
173 所谓寿命,是无力而且脆弱的。确实,有情的生命既依系于呼吸,也依系于威仪路(行住坐卧四种姿势),依系于寒热,依系于大种(地水火风四大),依系于食物。它只有在获得呼吸的平衡时才持续;如果向外的吸气不再进入,或向内的呼气不再外出,这就叫作死亡。它只有在获得四种威仪的平衡时才持续;如果其中任何一种过度,寿行便被切断。它只有在获得寒热平衡时才持续;如果被过寒或过热所征服,便会毁坏。它只有在获得大种平衡时才持续;如果地界或水界等任何一界发生紊乱,即使具足力量的人,也会身体僵硬,或因下痢等而湿烂腐败,或遭受大热恼,或骨节断裂,而达到生命的灭尽。段食也只有在适时获得时,生命才持续;得不到食物时,便走向灭尽。应当如此依寿命的虚弱性而念死。显示巴利原文
ti āyu nāmetaṃ abalaṃ dubbalaṃ. Tathā hi sattānaṃ jīvitaṃ assāsapassāsūpanibaddhañceva iriyāpathūpanibaddhañca sītuṇhūpanibaddhañca mahābhūtūpanibaddhañca āhārūpanibaddhañca. Tadetaṃ assāsapassāsānaṃ samavuttitaṃ labhamānameva pavattati. Bahi nikkhantanāsikavāte pana anto apavisante, paviṭṭhe vā anikkhamante mato nāma hoti. Catunnaṃ iriyāpathānampi samavuttitaṃ labhamānameva pavattati. Aññataraññatarassa pana adhimattatāya āyusaṅkhārā upacchijjanti. Sītuṇhānampi samavuttitaṃ labhamānameva pavattati. Atisītena pana atiuṇhena vā abhibhūtassa vipajjati. Mahābhūtānampi samavuttitaṃ labhamānameva pavattati. Pathavīdhātuyā pana āpodhātuādīnaṃ vā aññataraññatarassa pakopena balasampannopi puggalo patthaddhakāyo vā atisārādivasena kilinnapūtikāyo vā mahāḍāhapareto vā sambhijjamānasandhibandhano vā hutvā jīvitakkhayaṃ pāpuṇāti. Kabaḷīkārāhārampi yuttakāle labhantasseva jīvitaṃ pavattati, āhāraṃ alabhamānassa pana parikkhayaṃ gacchatīti. Evaṃ āyudubbalato maraṇaṃ anussaritabbaṃ.
174 所谓无确定,就是指没有固定的界限。因为对于有情来说——显示巴利原文
ti avavatthānato, paricchedābhāvatoti attho. Sattānaṃ hi –
命、病、时与身倒处,
此五者在生命世间,无相且不可知。
显示巴利原文 Jīvitaṃ byādhi kālo ca, dehanikkhepanaṃ gati; Pañcete jīvalokasmiṃ, animittā na nāyare.
其中,首先说生命:因为生命没有“只能活这么久,不能超过这个期限”的确定,所以它是无相(没有固定相状)的。因为有情在羯罗蓝(受精卵)阶段也会死,在阿浮陀(胚胎)、闭尸(肉团)、键南(坚肉)阶段也会死,在一个月、两个月、三个月、四个月、五个月、十个月时也会死;在出母胎时也会死;在这之后,活到百岁之内或者超过百岁,也必定会死。
再说疾病:因为疾病没有“有情只会因这种病而死,不会因其他病而死”的确定,所以它是无相的。因为有情因眼病也会死,因耳病等其他任何一种病也会死。
再说时节:因为时节没有“只应在此时死,不在其他时”这样的确定,所以它是无相的。因为有情在上午也会死,在中午等其他任何时间也会死。
再说身体的倒处:因为倒处没有“在此处死亡的人,身体应该倒在此处,不会倒在别处”的确定,所以它是无相的。因为在村内出生的人,身体也可能倒在村外;在村外出生的人,身体也可能倒在村内。同样,陆地上出生的人可能倒在水中,水中出生的人可能倒在陆地上,应该用多种方式详细说明。
再说趣处(投生之处):因为趣处没有“从此处死后,应该在此处投生”的确定,所以它是无相的。因为从天界死后也会投生到人中,从人界死后也会投生到天界等其他任何地方,就这样,世间在五趣中流转,如同被套上轭的牛一样。
应当这样以“无相”来忆念死亡。显示巴利原文
Tattha tāva ‘‘ettakameva jīvitabbaṃ, na ito para’’nti vavatthānābhāvato animittaṃ . Kalalakālepi hi sattā maranti, abbudapesighanamāsikadvemāsatemāsacatumāsapañcamāsadasamāsakālepi. Kucchito nikkhantasamayepi. Tato paraṃ vassasatassa antopi bahipi marantiyeva. pi ‘‘imināva byādhinā sattā maranti, nāññenā’’ti vavatthānābhāvato animitto. Cakkhurogenāpi hi sattā maranti, sotarogādīnaṃ aññatarenāpi. pi ‘‘imasmiṃyeva kāle maritabbaṃ, nāññasmi’’nti evaṃ vavatthānābhāvato animitto. Pubbaṇhepi hi sattā maranti, majjhanhikādīnaṃ aññatarasmimpi. mpi ‘‘idheva mīyamānānaṃ dehena patitabbaṃ, nāññatrā’’ti evaṃ vavatthānābhāvato animittaṃ. Antogāme jātānaṃ hi bahigāmepi attabhāvo patati. Bahigāme jātānampi antogāme. Tathā thalajānaṃ vā jale, jalajānaṃ vā thaleti anekappakārato vitthāretabbaṃ. pi ‘‘ito cutena idha nibbattitabba’’nti evaṃ vavatthānābhāvato animittā. Devalokato hi cutā manussesupi nibbattanti, manussalokato cutā devalokādīnampi yattha katthaci nibbattantīti evaṃ yantayuttagoṇo viya gatipañcake loko samparivattatīti evaṃ animittato maraṇaṃ anussaritabbaṃ.
175 如今,人的寿命确实是短暂的。长寿的人活到一百岁,或者稍微多一点。因此世尊说:“诸比丘,人的寿命短促,不久就要去到来世。所以应当行善,应当修习梵行。出生的人绝没有不死的。诸比丘,那些长寿的人,也不过百岁上下而已。”显示巴利原文
ti manussānaṃ jīvitassa nāma etarahi paritto addhā. Yo ciraṃ jīvati, so vassasataṃ, appaṃ vā bhiyyo. Tenāha bhagavā – ‘‘appamidaṃ, bhikkhave, manussānaṃ āyu, gamanīyo samparāyo, kattabbaṃ kusalaṃ, caritabbaṃ brahmacariyaṃ, natthi jātassa amaraṇaṃ. Yo, bhikkhave, ciraṃ jīvati, so vassasataṃ, appaṃ vā bhiyyoti.
人寿甚短促,
善人应轻视它;
当如头燃而行,死王绝不会不来。」(相应部1.145)
显示巴利原文 Appamāyumanussānaṃ, hīḷeyya naṃ suporiso; Careyyādittasīsova, natthi maccussa nāgamoti. (saṃ. ni. 1.145);
又另外说到——“诸比丘,过去世有一位名叫阿拉咖的导师”——这部经用七种譬喻来庄严,应该详细地加以阐述。显示巴利原文
Aparampi āha – ‘‘bhūtapubbaṃ, bhikkhave, arako nāma satthā ahosī’’ti sabbampi sattahi upamāhi alaṅkataṃ suttaṃ vitthāretabbaṃ.
又说:“诸比丘,如果有比丘这样修习死念:‘啊,但愿我能活一日一夜,来作意世尊的教法,那我确实就做了很多。’诸比丘,如果有比丘这样修习死念:‘啊,但愿我能活一日,来作意世尊的教法,那我确实就做了很多。’诸比丘,如果有比丘这样修习死念:‘啊,但愿我能活过吃一团食的那段时间,来作意世尊的教法,那我确实就做了很多。’诸比丘,如果有比丘这样修习死念:‘啊,但愿我能活过咀嚼吞咽四五口食团的那段时间,来作意世尊的教法,那我确实就做了很多。’诸比丘,这些比丘被称为住于放逸,为了灭尽诸漏而迟缓地修习死念。诸比丘,如果有比丘这样修习死念:‘啊,但愿我能活过咀嚼吞咽一口食团的那段时间,来作意世尊的教法,那我确实就做了很多。’诸比丘,如果有比丘这样修习死念:‘啊,但愿我能活过入息后出息,或者出息后入息的那段时间,来作意世尊的教法,那我确实就做了很多。’诸比丘,这些比丘被称为住于不放逸,为了灭尽诸漏而敏捷地修习死念。”
如此看来,仅仅是咀嚼吞咽四五口食团的时间,寿命就是不可信赖、短暂无常的;应当这样依寿命的限制来随念死。显示巴利原文
Aparampi āha – ‘‘yocāyaṃ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu evaṃ maraṇassatiṃ bhāveti, aho vatāhaṃ rattindivaṃ jīveyyaṃ, bhagavato sāsanaṃ manasikareyyaṃ, bahuṃ vata me kataṃ assāti. Yocāyaṃ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu evaṃ maraṇassatiṃ bhāveti , aho vatāhaṃ divasaṃ jīveyyaṃ, bhagavato sāsanaṃ manasikareyyaṃ, bahuṃ vata me kataṃ assāti. Yo cāyaṃ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu evaṃ maraṇassatiṃ bhāveti, aho vatāhaṃ tadantaraṃ jīveyyaṃ, yadantaraṃ ekaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ bhuñjāmi, bhagavato sāsanaṃ manasikareyyaṃ, bahuṃ vata me kataṃ assāti. Yo cāyaṃ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu evaṃ maraṇassatiṃ bhāveti, aho vatāhaṃ tadantaraṃ jīveyyaṃ, yadantaraṃ cattāro pañca ālope saṅkhāditvā ajjhoharāmi, bhagavato sāsanaṃ manasikareyyaṃ, bahuṃ vata me kataṃ assāti. Ime vuccanti, bhikkhave, bhikkhū pamattā viharanti, dandhaṃ maraṇassatiṃ bhāventi āsavānaṃ khayāya. Yo ca khvāyaṃ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu evaṃ maraṇassatiṃ bhāveti, aho vatāhaṃ tadantaraṃ jīveyyaṃ, yadantaraṃ ekaṃ ālopaṃ saṅkhāditvā ajjhoharāmi, bhagavato sāsanaṃ manasikareyyaṃ, bahuṃ vata me kataṃ assāti. Yo cāyaṃ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu evaṃ maraṇassatiṃ bhāveti, aho vatāhaṃ tadantaraṃ jīveyyaṃ, yadantaraṃ assasitvā vā passasāmi, passasitvā vā assasāmi, bhagavato sāsanaṃ manasikareyyaṃ, bahuṃ vata me kataṃ assāti. Ime vuccanti, bhikkhave, bhikkhū appamattā viharanti, tikkhaṃ maraṇassatiṃ bhāventi āsavānaṃ khayāyā’’ti (a. ni. 6.19). Evaṃ catupañcālopasaṅkhādanamattaṃ avissāsiyo paritto jīvitassa addhāti evaṃ addhānaparicchedato maraṇaṃ anussaritabbaṃ.
176 从究竟义(究竟真实的意义)来说,诸有情的生命刹那极其短促,仅仅是一个心识转起的程度而已。就像车轮,转动时只是以一个轮辐的边缘在转动,停住时也只是以一个轮辐的边缘在停住;同样,诸有情的生命只是一个心识刹那。当那个心识刚灭去,有情就被称为已灭。正如所说:“过去心刹那的有情,已经生存过,不是现在生存,也不是未来生存。未来心刹那的有情,不是已经生存,不是现在生存,是未来才生存。现在心刹那的有情,不是已经生存,是现在生存,不是未来生存。”显示巴利原文
ti paramatthato hi atiparitto sattānaṃ jīvitakkhaṇo ekacittappavattimattoyeva. Yathā nāma rathacakkaṃ pavattamānampi ekeneva nemippadesena pavattati, tiṭṭhamānampi ekeneva tiṭṭhati, evameva ekacittakkhaṇikaṃ sattānaṃ jīvitaṃ. Tasmiṃ citte niruddhamatte satto niruddhoti vuccati. Yathāha – ‘‘atīte cittakkhaṇe jīvittha, na jīvati, na jīvissati. Anāgate cittakkhaṇe na jīvittha, na jīvati, jīvissati. Paccuppanne cittakkhaṇe na jīvittha, jīvati, na jīvissati.
「命与自体及苦乐,
皆与一心相应起,彼刹那迅速转逝。」
「无论死者或存者,
一切诸蕴皆等同,
已去不复再结生。」
(此句已并入上段偈颂)
以未生故不生,依现存而活;
由心坏灭故世间死,此是依究竟义的施设。」(大义释39)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Jīvitaṃ attabhāvo ca, sukhadukkhā ca kevalā; Ekacittasamāyuttā, lahu so vattate khaṇo. ‘‘Ye niruddhā marantassa, tiṭṭhamānassa vā idha; Sabbepi sadisā khandhā, gatā appaṭisandhikā. ‘‘Anibbattena na jāto, paccuppannena jīvati; Cittabhaṅgā mato loko, paññatti paramatthiyā’’ti. (mahāni. 39);
如是,应以刹那短促而念死。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ khaṇaparittato maraṇaṃ anussaritabbaṃ.
177 就这样,用这八种方式中的任何一种来随念死亡的人,通过反复作意的力量,他的心得到了修习。以死亡为所缘的念得以确立,各种盖被镇伏,各种禅支显现出来。然而,由于所缘是自性法(具有自身特性的法)并且带有悚惧性,所以禅那并没有达到安止定,只达到了近行定。但是,出世间禅那以及第二、第四无色禅那,即使面对的是自性法,也能通过修习的殊胜而达到安止定。因为出世间禅那是依靠清净修习的次第而达到安止的,而无色禅那是依靠超越所缘的修习而达到安止的。因为只有达到安止的禅那,才有超越所缘的能力。但在这里,这两种情况都不具备。因此,禅那只达到近行定而已。而由死随念的力量所生起的这种定,就被称为死随念。显示巴利原文
Iti imesaṃ aṭṭhannaṃ ākārānaṃ aññataraññatarena anussaratopi punappunaṃ manasikāravasena cittaṃ āsevanaṃ labhati, maraṇārammaṇā sati santiṭṭhati, nīvaraṇāni vikkhambhanti, jhānaṅgāni pātubhavanti. Sabhāvadhammattā pana saṃvejanīyattā ca ārammaṇassa appanaṃ appatvā upacārappattameva jhānaṃ hoti. Lokuttarajjhānaṃ pana dutiyacatutthāni ca āruppajjhānāni sabhāvadhammepi bhāvanāvisesena appanaṃ pāpuṇanti. Visuddhibhāvanānukkamavasena hi lokuttaraṃ appanaṃ pāpuṇāti. Ārammaṇātikkamabhāvanāvasena āruppaṃ. Appanāpattasseva hi jhānassa ārammaṇasamatikkamanamattaṃ tattha hoti. Idha pana tadubhayampi natthi. Tasmā upacārappattameva jhānaṃ hoti. Tadetaṃ maraṇassatibalena uppannattā maraṇassaticceva saṅkhaṃ gacchati.
而且,精勤修习这种死随念的比丘,常常保持不放逸。他对于一切生存状态(有)都生起不喜乐想,舍弃了对生命的爱着,成为了一个呵责罪恶的人。在生活资具上,他不事积蓄,远离了悭吝的垢染。他的无常想得以熟练稳固,随之,苦想与无我想也会在他心中现起。那些没有修习过死念的有情,在死亡来临时,会如同突然被猛兽、夜叉、蟒蛇、盗贼或杀手制伏一般,陷入恐惧、惊慌和迷乱之中;而他却不会这样,他能无畏、不迷乱地命终。如果他在这一生中没有证得不死(涅槃),那么在身体坏灭之后,他将会投生到善趣。显示巴利原文
Imañca pana maraṇassatiṃ anuyutto bhikkhu satataṃ appamatto hoti, sabbabhavesu anabhiratisaññaṃ paṭilabhati, jīvitanikantiṃ jahāti, pāpagarahī hoti, asannidhibahulo parikkhāresu vigatamalamacchero, aniccasaññā cassa paricayaṃ gacchati, tadanusāreneva dukkhasaññā anattasaññā ca upaṭṭhāti. Yathā abhāvitamaraṇā sattā sahasā vāḷamigayakkhasappacoravadhakābhibhūtā viya maraṇasamaye bhayaṃ santāsaṃ sammohaṃ āpajjanti, evaṃ anāpajjitvā abhayo asammūḷho kālaṃ karoti. Sace diṭṭheva dhamme amataṃ nārādheti, kāyassa bhedā sugatiparāyano hoti.
因此,真实的善慧者,应常行不放逸,
应常修习如是具大威力的死随念。
显示巴利原文 Tasmā have appamādaṃ, kayirātha sumedhaso; Evaṃ mahānubhāvāya, maraṇassatiyā sadāti.
这是死随念的广说门。显示巴利原文
Idaṃ maraṇassatiyaṃ vitthārakathāmukhaṃ.
身至念论显示巴利原文
Kāyagatāsatikathā
178 现在,对于那种除了佛陀出世之外,过去从未流行过的、一切外道所不能企及的身至念,世尊在诸经中,以种种方式这样赞叹道:「诸比丘!有一法,修习、多修习,能导向大悚惧,导向大利益,导向大离轭安稳,导向大念正知,导向获得如实知见,导向现法安乐,导向明解脱果的作证。什么是一法?就是身至念……诸比丘!受用身至念者,就是受用不死;不受用身至念者,就是不受用不死。已经受用的人,就已经受用了不死;未曾受用的人,就未曾受用不死;已经困穷的人,就已经困穷了不死;未曾困穷的人,就未曾困穷不死;已经错失的人,就已经错失了不死;未曾错失的人,就未曾错失不死;已经勤修身至念的人……」世尊这样赞叹之后,又用「诸比丘!身至念如何修习、如何多修习才能有大果、大利益呢?诸比丘!在此,比丘前往阿兰若,或……」等方式,依照入出息节、威仪节、四正知节、厌恶作意节、界作意节、九冢间节,以这十四个章节开示了身至念这个业处。现在,到了对它的修习进行分别解说的部分。显示巴利原文
Idāni yaṃ taṃ aññatra buddhuppādā appavattapubbaṃ sabbatitthiyānaṃ avisayabhūtaṃ tesu tesu suttantesu ‘‘ekadhammo, bhikkhave, bhāvito bahulīkato mahato saṃvegāya saṃvattati. Mahato atthāya saṃvattati. Mahato yogakkhemāya saṃvattati. Mahato satisampajaññāya saṃvattati. Ñāṇadassanapaṭilābhāya saṃvattati. Diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārāya saṃvattati. Vijjāvimuttiphalasacchikiriyāya saṃvattati. Katamo ekadhammo? Kāyagatā sati… (a. ni. 1.563 ādayo). Amataṃ te, bhikkhave, paribhuñjanti, ye kāyagatāsatiṃ paribhuñjanti. Amataṃ te, bhikkhave, na paribhuñjanti, ye kāyagatāsatiṃ na paribhuñjanti. Amataṃ tesaṃ, bhikkhave, paribhuttaṃ… aparibhuttaṃ… parihīnaṃ… aparihīnaṃ… viraddhaṃ… aviraddhaṃ, yesaṃ kāyagatāsati āraddhāti (a. ni. 1.603) evaṃ bhagavatā anekehi ākārehi pasaṃsitvā ‘‘kathaṃ bhāvitā, bhikkhave, kāyagatāsati kathaṃ bahulīkatā mahapphalā hoti mahānisaṃsā? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu araññagato vā’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 3.154) nayena ānāpānapabbaṃ, iriyāpathapabbaṃ, catusampajaññapabbaṃ, paṭikkūlamanasikārapabbaṃ, dhātumanasikārapabbaṃ, navasivathikapabbānīti imesaṃ cuddasannaṃ pabbānaṃ vasena kāyagatāsatikammaṭṭhānaṃ niddiṭṭhaṃ, tassa bhāvanāniddeso anuppatto.
在这十四个章节中,威仪节、四正知节和界作意节这三节,是依观(毗婆舍那)而说的。九冢间节,是在观智中依过患随观而说的。即使在这些膨胀相等(指尸体变化的各个阶段)的相上修定也能成就,但那已经在对不净的说明中阐明了。然而,入出息节和厌恶作意节这两节,是依定(奢摩他)而说的。其中,入出息节依入出息念本身就是一种单独的业处。而这里所说的:「再者,诸比丘!比丘观察此身,从脚掌以上、发顶以下、为皮肤所包围,充满种种不净:此身有发、毛、爪、齿、皮、肉、筋、骨、骨髓、肾、心、肝、膜、脾、肺、大肠、小肠、胃中物、粪、脑、胆汁、痰、脓、血、汗、脂肪、泪、膏、唾、涕、关节滑液、尿。」这样依厌恶作意而说的三十二行相业处,在这里指的就是身至念。显示巴利原文
Tattha yasmā iriyāpathapabbaṃ catusampajaññapabbaṃ dhātumanasikārapabbanti imāni tīṇi vipassanāvasena vuttāni. Nava sivathikapabbāni vipassanāñāṇesuyeva ādīnavānupassanāvasena vuttāni. Yāpi cettha uddhumātakādīsu samādhibhāvanā ijjheyya, sā asubhaniddese pakāsitāyeva. Ānāpānapabbaṃ pana paṭikkūlamanasikārapabbañca imānevettha dve samādhivasena vuttāni. Tesu ānāpānapabbaṃ ānāpānassativasena visuṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃyeva. Yaṃ panetaṃ ‘‘puna caparaṃ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu imameva kāyaṃ uddhaṃ pādatalā adho kesamatthakā tacapariyantaṃ pūraṃ nānappakārassa asucino paccavekkhati. Atthi imasmiṃ kāye kesā lomā…pe… mutta’’nti (ma. ni. 3.154) evaṃ paṭikkūlamanasikāravasena desitaṃ dvattiṃsākārakammaṭṭhānaṃ, idamidha kāyagatāsatīti adhippetaṃ.
179 在这里,这是以解释圣典文句为先的修习分别论。「此身」就是指这个由四大所构成的、腐臭的身体。「从脚掌以上」就是从脚掌往上。「发顶以下」就是从头发顶端往下。「皮肤所包围」是指整个身体横向地被皮肤所限定包裹着。「充满种种不净」是说,要观见这个身体里充满了头发等等各种不净的东西。具体是哪些呢?就是「此身有发、毛、爪、齿、皮、肉、筋、骨、骨髓、肾、心、肝、膜、脾、肺、大肠、小肠、胃中物、粪、脑、胆汁、痰、脓、血、汗、脂肪、泪、膏、唾、涕、关节滑液、尿」。显示巴利原文
Tatthāyaṃ pāḷivaṇṇanāpubbaṅgamo bhāvanāniddeso. nti imaṃ catumahābhūtikaṃ pūtikāyaṃ. ti pādatalato upari. ti kesaggato heṭṭhā. nti tiriyaṃ tacaparicchinnaṃ. ti nānappakārakesādiasucibharito ayaṃ kāyoti passati. Kathaṃ? Atthi imasmiṃ kāye kesā…pe… muttanti.
在这里,『有』就是存在的意思。『此身』是指那个从脚掌以上、发顶以下、以皮肤为界限、充满种种不净的身体,也就是在这个身体之中。『身』就是身体。因为身体是不净物的积聚,又因为是头发等令人厌恶的东西以及眼病等上百种疾病的生起之处,所以称为身。『发等』就是指头发等这三十二种行相。其中,应该知道它们之间的连接方式是:此身有发,此身有毛。显示巴利原文
Tattha ti saṃvijjanti. nti yvāyaṃ uddhaṃ pādatalā adho kesamatthakā tacapariyanto pūro nānappakārassa asucinoti vuccati, tasmiṃ. ti sarīre. Sarīraṃ hi asucisañcayato kucchitānaṃ kesādīnañceva cakkhurogādīnañca rogasatānaṃ āyabhūtato kāyoti vuccati. ti ete kesādayo dvattiṃsākārā. Tattha atthi imasmiṃ kāye kesā, atthi imasmiṃ kāye lomāti evaṃ sambandho veditabbo.
在这里,从脚底往上、从头顶往下、从皮肤往内,在这具约一寻长的身体里,即使用尽一切方法去寻找,也找不到任何珍珠、摩尼宝珠、琉璃、沉香、郁金香、龙脑香、香粉之类的东西,甚至连微尘那么小的清净之物都找不到。相反,只能见到种种极其恶臭、令人厌恶、丑陋不雅的不净物,也就是:头发、体毛、指甲、牙齿、皮肤、肉、筋、骨、骨髓、肾、心脏、肝、膜、脾、肺、大肠、小肠、胃中物、粪便、脑、胆汁、痰、脓、血、汗、脂肪、泪、膏、唾液、鼻涕、关节滑液、尿。因此经中说:'此身有头发、体毛、指甲、牙齿、皮肤、肉、筋、骨、骨髓、肾、心脏、肝、膜、脾、肺、大肠、小肠、胃中物、粪便、脑、胆汁、痰、脓、血、汗、脂肪、泪、膏、唾液、鼻涕、关节滑液、尿。'这是按照词句连接的解释。显示巴利原文
Imasmiṃ hi pādatalā paṭṭhāya upari, kesamatthakā paṭṭhāya heṭṭhā, tacato paṭṭhāya paritoti ettake byāmamatte kaḷevare sabbākārenapi vicinanto na koci kiñci muttaṃ vā maṇiṃ vā veḷuriyaṃ vā agaruṃ vā kuṅkumaṃ vā kappūraṃ vā vāsacuṇṇādiṃ vā aṇumattampi sucibhāvaṃ passati, atha kho paramaduggandhajegucchaṃ asirikadassanaṃ nānappakāraṃ kesalomādibhedaṃ asuciṃyeva passati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘atthi imasmiṃ kāye kesā lomā…pe… mutta’’nti. Ayamettha padasambandhato vaṇṇanā.
180 然而,想要修习这个业处的初学善男子,应该前往前面所说的善知识那里,去领受这个业处。为他讲说业处的人,应当教导七种把持善巧和十种作意善巧。在这其中,应当教导以语、以意、以色、以形、以方位、以处所、以界限,这样七种把持善巧。显示巴利原文
Imaṃ pana kammaṭṭhānaṃ bhāvetukāmena ādikammikena kulaputtena vuttappakāraṃ kalyāṇamittaṃ upasaṅkamitvā idaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetabbaṃ. Tenāpissa kammaṭṭhānaṃ kathentena sattadhā uggahakosallaṃ dasadhā ca manasikārakosallaṃ ācikkhitabbaṃ. Tattha vacasā manasā vaṇṇato saṇṭhānato disato okāsato paricchedatoti evaṃ sattadhā uggahakosallaṃ ācikkhitabbaṃ.
在这个厌恶作意业处中,即使是通达三藏的人,在作意时也应该首先用言语来读诵。因为对某些人来说,正在读诵的时候,业处就会变得清晰,就像在马拉耶居住的玛哈德瓦长老那里学得业处的两位长老一样。据说,那两位长老向他请求业处时,他给了三十二行相的经文,并说:'你们四个月只做这个读诵。'他们虽然精通两三部尼柯耶,但以正确的方式受持后,四个月中只读诵三十二行相,便证得了须陀洹。因此,讲说业处的导师应该告诉弟子:'首先用言语来读诵。'显示巴利原文
Imasmiṃ hi paṭikkūlamanasikārakammaṭṭhāne yopi tipiṭako hoti, tenāpi manasikārakāle paṭhamaṃ vācāya sajjhāyo kātabbo. Ekaccassa hi sajjhāyaṃ karontasseva kammaṭṭhānaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti malayavāsī mahādevattherassa santike uggahitakammaṭṭhānānaṃ dvinnaṃ therānaṃ viya. Thero kira tehi kammaṭṭhānaṃ yācito cattāro māse imaṃyeva sajjhāyaṃ karothāti dvattiṃsākārapāḷiṃ adāsi. Te kiñcāpi nesaṃ dve tayo nikāyā paguṇā, padakkhiṇaggāhitāya pana cattāro māse dvattiṃsākāraṃ sajjhāyantāva sotāpannā ahesuṃ. Tasmā kammaṭṭhānaṃ kathentena ācariyena antevāsiko vattabbo ‘‘paṭhamaṃ tāva vācāya sajjhāyaṃ karohī’’ti.
读诵的时候,应该先划分界限,以顺逆的方式读诵。也就是说,说了'头发、体毛、指甲、牙齿、皮肤'之后,再以逆序说'皮肤、牙齿、指甲、体毛、头发'。显示巴利原文
Karontena ca ni paricchinditvā anulomapaṭilomavasena sajjhāyo kātabbo. Kesā lomā nakhā dantā tacoti hi vatvā puna paṭilomato taco dantā nakhā lomā kesāti vattabbaṃ.
在此之后,说了'肉、腱、骨、骨髓、肾'之后,再以逆序说'肾、骨髓、骨、腱、肉,皮肤、牙齿、指甲、体毛、头发'。显示巴利原文
Tadanantaraṃ maṃsaṃ nhāru aṭṭhi aṭṭhimiñjaṃ vakkanti vatvā puna paṭilomato vakkaṃ aṭṭhimiñjaṃ aṭṭhi nhāru maṃsaṃ, taco dantā nakhā lomā kesāti vattabbaṃ.
然后,说了'心脏、肝、膈膜、脾、肺'之后,再以逆序说'肺、脾、膈膜、肝、心脏,肾、骨髓、骨、腱、肉,皮肤、牙齿、指甲、体毛、头发'。显示巴利原文
Tato hadayaṃ yakanaṃ kilomakaṃ pihakaṃ papphāsanti vatvā puna paṭilomato papphāsaṃ pihakaṃ kilomakaṃ yakanaṃ hadayaṃ, vakkaṃ aṭṭhimiñjaṃ aṭṭhi nhāru maṃsaṃ, taco dantā nakhā lomā kesāti vattabbaṃ.
然后,在说完「肠、肠间膜、胃中物、粪、脑」之后,应该再反过来,按逆序说:「脑、粪、胃中物、肠间膜、肠,肺、脾、膈膜、肝、心脏,肾、骨髓、骨、腱、肉,皮、齿、爪、毛、发」。显示巴利原文
Tato antaṃ antaguṇaṃ udariyaṃ karīsaṃ matthaluṅganti vatvā puna paṭilomato matthaluṅgaṃ karīsaṃ udariyaṃ antaguṇaṃ antaṃ, papphāsaṃ pihakaṃ kilomakaṃ yakanaṃ hadayaṃ, vakkaṃ aṭṭhimiñjaṃ aṭṭhi nhāru maṃsaṃ, taco dantā nakhā lomā kesāti vattabbaṃ.
然后,应该按照逆序再说一遍:脂肪、汗、红、脓、痰、胆汁,脑、粪、胃中物、肠间膜、肠,肺、脾、膈膜、肝、心脏,肾、骨髓、骨、腱、肉,皮、齿、爪、毛、发。显示巴利原文
Tato pittaṃ semhaṃ pubbo lohitaṃ sedo medoti vatvā puna paṭilomato medo sedo lohitaṃ pubbo semhaṃ pittaṃ, matthaluṅgaṃ karīsaṃ udariyaṃ antaguṇaṃ antaṃ, papphāsaṃ pihakaṃ kilomakaṃ yakanaṃ hadayaṃ, vakkaṃ aṭṭhimiñjaṃ aṭṭhi nhāru maṃsaṃ, taco dantā nakhā lomā kesāti vattabbaṃ.
然后,说了“泪、膏、唾、鼻涕、关节滑液、尿”之后,应该再反过来,按逆序说一遍:“尿、关节滑液、鼻涕、唾、膏、泪,脂肪、汗、红、脓、痰、胆汁,脑、粪、胃中物、肠间膜、肠,肺、脾、膈膜、肝、心脏,肾、骨髓、骨、腱、肉,皮、齿、爪、毛、发”。显示巴利原文
Tato assu vasā kheḷo siṅghāṇikā lasikā muttanti vatvā puna paṭilomato muttaṃ lasikā siṅghāṇikā kheḷo vasā assu, medo sedo lohitaṃ pubbo semhaṃ pittaṃ, matthaluṅgaṃ karīsaṃ udariyaṃ antaguṇaṃ antaṃ, papphāsaṃ pihakaṃ kilomakaṃ yakanaṃ hadayaṃ, vakkaṃ aṭṭhimiñjaṃ aṭṭhi nhāru maṃsaṃ, taco dantā nakhā lomā kesāti vattabbaṃ.
应该这样用言语读诵一百遍、一千遍、十万遍。因为通过言语读诵,业处的脉络就会纯熟,心就不会到处散乱。身体的各个部分会变得清晰,就像手链、像篱笆一样清楚地显现出来。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ kālasataṃ kālasahassaṃ kālasatasahassampi vācāya sajjhāyo kātabbo. Vacasā sajjhāyena hi kammaṭṭhānatanti paguṇā hoti, na ito cito ca cittaṃ vidhāvati. Koṭṭhāsā pākaṭā honti, hatthasaṅkhalikā viya vatipādapanti viya ca khāyanti.
如同用言语读诵一样,也应该同样用心意来读诵。因为用言语读诵是用心意读诵的条件(缘),而用心意读诵则是通达相(似相)的条件(缘)。显示巴利原文
Yathā pana vacasā, tatheva manasāpi sajjhāyo kātabbo. Vacasā sajjhāyo hi manasā sajjhāyassa paccayo hoti. Manasā sajjhāyo lakkhaṇapaṭivedhassa paccayo hoti.
(以色)——即应确定发等的颜色。显示巴利原文
ti kesādīnaṃ vaṇṇo vavatthapetabbo.
(以形状来观察)——也就是应该确定它们(头发等三十二身分)的形状。显示巴利原文
ti tesaññeva saṇṭhānaṃ vavatthapetabbaṃ.
(以方位来观察)——在这身体中,肚脐以上是上方,肚脐以下是下方。这样,你就应该确定“这个部分在这个方位”。显示巴利原文
ti imasmiṃ hi sarīre nābhito uddhaṃ uparimadisā, adho heṭṭhimadisā, tasmā ayaṃ koṭṭhāso imissā nāma disāyāti disā vavatthapetabbā.
(以处所来观察)——你应该确定每个部分各自的位置,比如“这个部分就安立在这个地方”。显示巴利原文
ti ayaṃ koṭṭhāso imasmiṃ nāma okāse patiṭṭhitoti evaṃ tassa tassa okāso vavatthapetabbo.
界限有两种:同类界限和异类界限。其中,同类界限应该这样理解:“这个部分在下面、在上面、在横向,就以这些方位作为它的界限”。异类界限则是指它们彼此不混杂,比如“头发不是体毛,体毛也不是头发”。显示巴利原文
ti sabhāgaparicchedo visabhāgaparicchedoti dve paricchedā. Tattha ayaṃ koṭṭhāso heṭṭhā ca upari ca tiriyañca iminā nāma paricchinnoti evaṃ sabhāgaparicchedo veditabbo. Kesā na lomā, lomāpi na kesāti evaṃ amissakatāvasena visabhāgaparicchedo veditabbo.
当你这样教导七种掌握善巧时,还应该知道,这个业处在某些经典里是从厌恶的角度来解说的,在另一些经典里是从界的角度来解说的,并且应该这样去教导。因为这个业处在《大念处经》中,纯粹是从厌恶的角度来解说的;在《大象迹喻经》、《大教诫罗睺罗经》、《界分别经》等经典中,则是从界的角度来解说的。然而在《身至念经》中,则根据所现起的相,分别解说了四种禅那。其中,从界角度解说的是观业处;从厌恶角度解说的是止业处。因此,这里所讨论的纯粹是止业处。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ sattadhā uggahakosallaṃ ācikkhantena pana idaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ asukasmiṃ sutte paṭikkūlavasena kathitaṃ, asukasmiṃ dhātuvasenāti ñatvā ācikkhitabbaṃ. Idañhi mahāsatipaṭṭhāne (dī. ni. 2.377) paṭikkūlavaseneva kathitaṃ. Mahāhatthipadopama(ma. ni. 1.300 ādayo) mahārāhulovāda(ma. ni. 2.113 ādayo) dhātuvibhaṅgesu(ma. ni. 3.342 ādayo) dhātuvasena kathitaṃ. Kāyagatāsatisutte (ma. ni. 3.153) pana yassa vaṇṇato upaṭṭhāti, taṃ sandhāya cattāri jhānāni vibhattāni. Tattha dhātuvasena kathitaṃ vipassanākammaṭṭhānaṃ hoti. Paṭikkūlavasena kathitaṃ samathakammaṭṭhānaṃ. Tadetaṃ idha samathakammaṭṭhānamevāti.
181 这样教导了七种掌握善巧之后,还应该教导十种作意善巧,它们是:次第、不太快、不太慢、遮止散乱、超越概念、次第舍弃、安止,以及三经。其中,“次第”的意思是:从背诵开始,就应该按照顺序来作意,不要跳过去。因为跳过作意的人,就像一个不善于攀爬的人,想跳着攀登三十二级的阶梯,结果身体疲惫不堪,最终跌倒,无法完成攀登。同样地,因为他没有获得那些必须通过修习成就才能证得的法味,心就会疲倦而退堕,无法完成修习。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ sattadhā uggahakosallaṃ ācikkhitvā anupubbato, nātisīghato, nātisaṇikato, vikkhepapaṭibāhanato, paṇṇattisamatikkamanato, anupubbamuñcanato, appanāto, tayo ca suttantāti evaṃ dasadhā manasikārakosallaṃ ācikkhitabbaṃ. Tattha ti idañhi sajjhāyakaraṇato paṭṭhāya anupaṭipāṭiyā manasikātabbaṃ, na ekantarikāya. Ekantarikāya hi manasikaronto yathā nāma akusalo puriso dvattiṃsapadaṃ nisseṇiṃ ekantarikāya ārohanto kilantakāyo patati, na ārohanaṃ sampādeti, evameva bhāvanāsampattivasena adhigantabbassa assādassa anadhigamā kilantacitto patati, na bhāvanaṃ sampādeti.
即使按照次第来作意,也不应该过于急促地作意。因为过于急促作意的人,就好比一个人要走三由旬的路,却不辨明哪里该进入、哪里该离开,只是以极快的速度来回跑上百次。虽然跑了很长的路程,却仍然不清楚道路,还得向人问路才能走。同样地,他只是完成了业处的作意,但所缘却不清晰明了,这不能成为证得殊胜成就的助缘。因此,不应该过于急促地作意。显示巴利原文
Anupubbato manasikarontenāpi ca manasikātabbaṃ. Atisīghato manasikaroto hi yathā nāma tiyojanamaggaṃ paṭipajjitvā okkamanavissajjanaṃ asallakkhetvā sīghena javena satakkhattumpi gamanāgamanaṃ karoto purisassa kiñcāpi addhānaṃ parikkhayaṃ gacchati, atha kho pucchitvāva gantabbaṃ hoti, evameva kevalaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ pariyosānaṃ pāpuṇāti, avibhūtaṃ pana hoti, na visesaṃ āvahati, tasmā nātisīghato manasikātabbaṃ.
就像不应该太急一样,也不应该太慢。因为如果作意太慢,就好比有人想在一天内走完三由旬的路程,却在途中被树木、山丘、池塘等地方耽搁,结果当天走不到终点,需要两三天才能完成。同样地,业处修行也会到不了终点,无法成为证得殊胜成就的助缘。显示巴利原文
Yathā ca nātisīghato, evaṃ pi. Atisaṇikato manasikaroto hi yathā nāma tadaheva tiyojanamaggaṃ gantukāmassa purisassa antarāmagge rukkhapabbatataḷākādīsu vilambamānassa maggo parikkhayaṃ na gacchati, dvīhatīhena pariyosāpetabbo hoti, evameva kammaṭṭhānaṃ pariyosānaṃ na gacchati, visesādhigamassa paccayo na hoti.
应该防止心舍弃业处,向外在各种所缘上散乱。因为如果不防止,就好比有人走一条只有一脚宽的悬崖路,却不注意脚下,东张西望,结果脚步错乱,从百仞高的悬崖上掉下去。同样地,如果心向外散乱,业处就会退失、毁坏。所以应该以防止散乱的方式来作意。显示巴利原文
ti kammaṭṭhānaṃ vissajjetvā bahiddhā puthuttārammaṇe cetaso vikkhepo paṭibāhitabbo. Appaṭibāhato hi yathā nāma ekapadikaṃ papātamaggaṃ paṭipannassa purisassa akkamanapadaṃ asallakkhetvā ito cito ca vilokayato padavāro virajjhati, tato sataporise papāte patitabbaṃ hoti, evameva bahiddhā vikkhepe sati kammaṭṭhānaṃ parihāyati paridhaṃsati. Tasmā vikkhepapaṭibāhanato manasikātabbaṃ.
应该超越'发、毛'等概念,把心安立在厌恶上。就好比在缺水的时候,人们在树林里发现了一口水井,就在那里系上棕榈叶之类的标记,依靠那个标记来洗澡和喝水。但当他们频繁往来,来回的路已经很明显时,就不再需要标记了,随时想去就可以去洗澡喝水。同样地,在初期用'发、毛'等概念来作意的人,当厌恶变得明显之后,就应该超越'发、毛'等概念,把心安立在厌恶本身。显示巴利原文
ti yāyaṃ kesā lomātiādikā paṇṇatti, taṃ atikkamitvā paṭikkūlanti cittaṃ ṭhapetabbaṃ. Yathā hi udakadullabhakāle manussā araññe udapānaṃ disvā tattha tālapaṇṇādikaṃ kiñcideva saññāṇaṃ bandhitvā tena saññāṇena āgantvā nhāyanti ceva pivanti ca. Yadā pana nesaṃ abhiṇhasañcārena āgatāgatapadaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti, tadā saññāṇena kiccaṃ na hoti, icchiticchitakkhaṇe gantvā nhāyanti ceva pivanti ca, evameva pubbabhāge kesā lomātipaṇṇattivasena manasikaroto paṭikkūlabhāvo pākaṭo hoti. Atha kesā lomātipaṇṇattiṃ samatikkamitvā paṭikkūlabhāveyeva cittaṃ ṭhapetabbaṃ.
应该次第舍弃地作意,也就是说:哪个部分不现起,就舍弃那个部分。因为初学者作意'发'的时候,他的作意进行之后,只会停在'尿'这最后一个部分。而作意'尿'的时候,他的作意进行之后,只会停在'发'这最初一个部分。当他不断作意时,有些部分会现起,有些不会现起。因此,对于现起的那些部分,应该暂时在那些部分上用功。直到有两个部分现起时,其中一者更清楚地现起,对这样现起的部分,应该反复作意,从而生起安止定。显示巴利原文
ti yo yo koṭṭhāso na upaṭṭhāti, taṃ taṃ muñcantena anupubbamuñcanato manasikātabbaṃ. Ādikammikassa hi kesāti manasikaroto manasikāro gantvā muttanti imaṃ pariyosānakoṭṭhāsameva āhacca tiṭṭhati. Muttanti ca manasikaroto manasikāro gantvā kesāti imaṃ ādikoṭṭhāsameva āhacca tiṭṭhati. Athassa manasikaroto manasikaroto keci koṭṭhāsā upaṭṭhahanti, keci na upaṭṭhahanti. Tena ye ye upaṭṭhahanti, tesu tesu tāva kammaṃ kātabbaṃ. Yāva dvīsu upaṭṭhitesu tesampi eko suṭṭhutaraṃ upaṭṭhahati, evaṃ upaṭṭhitaṃ pana tameva punappunaṃ manasikarontena appanā uppādetabbā.
这里有一个譬喻:好比猎人想捕捉住在有三十二棵棕榈树的棕榈林里的猴子,他先用箭射穿最前面那棵棕榈树的叶子,并发出喊声,于是那猴子就依次从一棵棕榈树跳到另一棵,一直跳到最后那棵棕榈树。到了那里之后,猎人又同样做一次,猴子又以同样的方式回到最初那棵棕榈树。它这样反复被驱赶,每次在发出喊声的地方就跳起来,渐渐地停在一棵棕榈树上,紧紧抓住那棵树中央嫩棕榈叶的刺,即使被箭射也不起来。应该这样来看待这个譬喻。显示巴利原文
Tatrāyaṃ upamā – yathā hi dvattiṃsatālake tālavane vasantaṃ makkaṭaṃ gahetukāmo luddo ādimhi ṭhitatālassa paṇṇaṃ sarena vijjhitvā ukkuṭṭhiṃ kareyya, atha kho so makkaṭo paṭipāṭiyā tasmiṃ tasmiṃ tāle patitvā pariyantatālameva gaccheyya, tatthapi gantvā luddena tatheva kate puna teneva nayena āditālaṃ āgaccheyya, so evaṃ punappunaṃ paripātiyamāno ukkuṭṭhukkuṭṭhiṭṭhāneyeva uṭṭhahitvā anukkamena ekasmiṃ tāle nipatitvā tassa vemajjhe makuḷatālapaṇṇasūciṃ daḷhaṃ gahetvā vijjhiyamānopi na uṭṭhaheyya, evaṃsampadamidaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.
这里说明譬喻的配合:如同棕榈林里有三十二棵棕榈树,同样地,这个身体里有三十二个部分。心如同猴子。瑜伽行者如同猎人。猴子住在有三十二棵棕榈树的棕榈林里,如同瑜伽行者的心以所缘的方式游移于有三十二个部分的身体。猎人先用箭射穿最前面那棵棕榈树的叶子并发出喊声,猴子就依次跳过每一棵棕榈树,直到最后那棵棕榈树,如同瑜伽行者开始作意'发'的时候,他的心依次进行之后,只停在最后一个部分。再回来时也是同样的道理。猴子反复被驱赶时,在每次发出喊声的地方就跳起来,如同反复作意时,在某些部分现起的情况下,舍弃不现起的部分,而对现起的部分做遍作(预备工作)。渐渐地停在一棵棕榈树上,紧紧抓住那棵树中央嫩棕榈叶的刺,即使被箭射也不起来,如同最终在两个部分现起时,对更清楚地现起的那个部分,反复作意而生起安止定。显示巴利原文
Tatridaṃ opammasaṃsandanaṃ – yathā hi tālavane dvattiṃsatālā, evaṃ imasmiṃ kāye dvattiṃsakoṭṭhāsā. Makkaṭo viya cittaṃ. Luddo viya yogāvacaro. Makkaṭassa dvattiṃsatālake tālavane nivāso viya yogino cittassa dvattiṃsakoṭṭhāsake kāye ārammaṇavasena anusañcaraṇaṃ. Luddena ādimhi ṭhitatālassa paṇṇaṃ sarena vijjhitvā ukkuṭṭhiyā katāya makkaṭassa tasmiṃ tasmiṃ tāle patitvā pariyantatālagamanaṃ viya yogino kesāti manasikāre āraddhe paṭipāṭiyā gantvā pariyosānakoṭṭhāseyeva cittassa saṇṭhānaṃ. Puna paccāgamanepi eseva nayo. Punappunaṃ paripātiyamānassa makkaṭassa ukkuṭṭhukkuṭṭhiṭṭhāne uṭṭhānaṃ viya punappunaṃ manasikaroto kesuci kesuci upaṭṭhitesu anupaṭṭhahante vissajjetvā upaṭṭhitesu parikammakaraṇaṃ. Anukkamena ekasmiṃ tāle nipatitvā tassa majjhe makuḷatālapaṇṇasūciṃ daḷhaṃ gahetvā vijjhiyamānassapi anuṭṭhānaṃ viya avasāne dvīsu upaṭṭhitesu yo suṭṭhutaraṃ upaṭṭhāti, tameva punappunaṃ manasikaritvā appanāya uppādanaṃ.
再举一个譬喻:好比一位托钵乞食的比丘,住在一个有三十二户人家的村庄附近。他第一天在头一户人家就得到了两份食物,于是后面的那一户就不去了;第二天得到了三份,于是后面的两户就不去了;第三天一开头就得到了满满一钵,于是就直接去斋堂受用食物了。这里应该这样配合譬喻来理解:三十二户人家的村庄,好比三十二个部分;托钵乞食的比丘,好比修行者;他依止那个村庄而住,好比修行者在三十二个部分上做遍作(预备修习);第一天得到两份食物后舍弃后面一户、第二天得到三份后舍弃后面两户,好比在不断作意时,那些不现起的部分逐渐被舍弃,直到只对现起部分中的两个部分做遍作;第三天一开头就得到满钵而去斋堂受用,好比在那两个部分中,对现起更清楚的那一个反复作意,最终生起安止定。显示巴利原文
Aparāpi upamā – yathā nāma piṇḍapātiko bhikkhu dvattiṃsakulaṃ gāmaṃ upanissāya vasanto paṭhamageheyeva dve bhikkhā labhitvā parato ekaṃ vissajjeyya. Punadivase tisso labhitvā parato dve vissajjeyya. Tatiyadivase ādimhiyeva pattapūraṃ labhitvā āsanasālaṃ gantvā paribhuñjeyya. Evaṃsampadamidaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Dvattiṃsakulagāmo viya hi dvattiṃsākāro. Piṇḍapātiko viya yogāvacaro. Tassa taṃ gāmaṃ upanissāya vāso viya yogino dvattiṃsākāre parikammakaraṇaṃ. Paṭhamagehe dve bhikkhā labhitvā parato ekissā vissajjanaṃ viya dutiyadivase tisso labhitvā parato dvinnaṃ vissajjanaṃ viya ca manasikaroto manasikaroto anupaṭṭhahante vissajjetvā upaṭṭhitesu yāva koṭṭhāsadvaye parikammakaraṇaṃ. Tatiyadivase ādimhiyeva pattapūraṃ labhitvā āsanasālāyaṃ nisīditvā paribhogo viya dvīsu yo suṭṭhutaraṃ upaṭṭhāti, tameva punappunaṃ manasikaritvā appanāya uppādanaṃ.
「以安止」——应该知道,在头发等每一个部分中,从能够达到安止定的那个部分来说,确实会有安止定生起。这就是此处要表达的意思。显示巴利原文
ti appanākoṭṭhāsato kesādīsu ekekasmiṃ koṭṭhāse appanā hotīti veditabbāti ayamevettha adhippāyo.
「三」:指的是《增上心经》、《清凉经》和《觉支善巧经》这三部经。应该知道,这三部经是为了把精进和定结合起来而说的,这就是此处要表达的意思。其中——显示巴利原文
ti adhicittaṃ, sītibhāvo, bojjhaṅgakosallanti ime tayo suttantā vīriyasamādhiyojanatthaṃ veditabbāti ayamettha adhippāyo. Tattha –
「诸比丘!勤修增上心的比丘,应当对三种相时时作意:时时作意定相,时时作意策励相,时时作意舍相。诸比丘!勤修增上心的比丘,如果只专一作意定相,他的心就可能趋向懈怠。诸比丘!勤修增上心的比丘,如果只专一作意策励相,他的心就可能趋向掉举。诸比丘!勤修增上心的比丘,如果只专一作意舍相,他的心就可能无法为了断尽烦恼而正确地入定。诸比丘!然而,勤修增上心的比丘,如果能够时时对定相、策励相以及舍相作意,他的心就会变得柔软、适合运作、明亮光辉,而且不脆弱,能够为了断尽烦恼而正确地入定。」显示巴利原文
‘‘Adhicittamanuyuttena , bhikkhave, bhikkhunā tīṇi nimittāni kālenakālaṃ manasikātabbāni. Kālenakālaṃ samādhinimittaṃ manasikātabbaṃ. Kālenakālaṃ paggahanimittaṃ manasikātabbaṃ. Kālenakālaṃ upekkhānimittaṃ manasikātabbaṃ. Sace, bhikkhave, adhicittamanuyutto bhikkhu ekantaṃ samādhinimittaññeva manasikareyya, ṭhānaṃ taṃ cittaṃ kosajjāya saṃvatteyya. Sace, bhikkhave, adhicittamanuyutto bhikkhu ekantaṃ paggahanimittaññeva manasikareyya, ṭhānaṃ taṃ cittaṃ uddhaccāya saṃvatteyya. Sace, bhikkhave, adhicittamanuyutto bhikkhu ekantaṃ upekkhānimittaññeva manasikareyya, ṭhānaṃ taṃ cittaṃ na sammā samādhiyeyya āsavānaṃ khayāya. Yato ca kho, bhikkhave, adhicittamanuyutto bhikkhu kālenakālaṃ samādhinimittaṃ paggahanimittaṃ upekkhānimittaṃ manasikaroti, taṃ hoti cittaṃ muduñca kammaññañca pabhassarañca, na ca pabhaṅgu, sammā samādhiyati āsavānaṃ khayāya.
「诸比丘!譬如金匠或金匠的徒弟,先造好熔炉,造好熔炉后,在炉口点火,点着火后,用火钳夹着金子放进炉口,然后时时吹风,时时洒水,时时放舍不管。诸比丘!如果金匠或金匠的徒弟只专一对金子吹风,金子就可能烧毁。诸比丘!如果金匠或金匠的徒弟只专一对金子洒水,金子就可能冷却变硬。诸比丘!如果金匠或金匠的徒弟只专一对金子放舍不管,金子就可能达不到恰到好处的成熟。诸比丘!然而,金匠或金匠的徒弟对金子时时吹风、时时洒水、时时放舍,金子就会变得柔软、适合加工、明亮光辉而且不脆弱,达到恰当的可用状态——无论想用金子制作手镯、耳环、颈饰、金鬘等各种装饰品,都能达成他的目的。」显示巴利原文
‘‘Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, suvaṇṇakāro vā suvaṇṇakārantevāsī vā ukkaṃ bandhati, ukkaṃ bandhitvā ukkāmukhaṃ ālimpeti, ukkāmukhaṃ ālimpetvā saṇḍāsena jātarūpaṃ gahetvā ukkāmukhe pakkhipitvā kālenakālaṃ abhidhamati, kālenakālaṃ udakena paripphoseti, kālenakālaṃ ajjhupekkhati. Sace, bhikkhave, suvaṇṇakāro vā suvaṇṇakārantevāsī vā taṃ jātarūpaṃ ekantaṃ abhidhameyya, ṭhānaṃ taṃ jātarūpaṃ ḍaheyya. Sace, bhikkhave, suvaṇṇakāro vā suvaṇṇakārantevāsī vā taṃ jātarūpaṃ ekantaṃ udakena paripphoseyya, ṭhānaṃ taṃ jātarūpaṃ nibbāyeyya. Sace, bhikkhave, suvaṇṇakāro vā suvaṇṇakārantevāsī vā taṃ jātarūpaṃ ekantaṃ ajjhupekkheyya, ṭhānaṃ taṃ jātarūpaṃ na sammā paripākaṃ gaccheyya. Yato ca kho, bhikkhave, suvaṇṇakāro vā suvaṇṇakārantevāsī vā taṃ jātarūpaṃ kālenakālaṃ abhidhamati, kālenakālaṃ udakena paripphoseti, kālenakālaṃ ajjhupekkhati, taṃ hoti jātarūpaṃ muduñca kammaññañca pabhassarañca, na ca pabhaṅgu, sammā upeti kammāya. Yassā yassā ca piḷandhanavikatiyā ākaṅkhati yadi paṭikāya yadi kuṇḍalāya yadi gīveyyāya yadi suvaṇṇamālāya, tañcassa atthaṃ anubhoti.
「诸比丘!同样地,勤修增上心的比丘,应当时时对三种相作意:时时作意定相,时时作意策励相,时时作意舍相。诸比丘!勤修增上心的比丘,如果只专一作意定相,他的心就可能趋向懈怠;如果只专一作意策励相,他的心就可能趋向掉举;如果只专一作意舍相,他的心就可能无法为了断尽烦恼而正确地入定。诸比丘!然而,勤修增上心的比丘,如果时时对定相、策励相以及舍相作意,他的心就会变得柔软、适合运作、明亮光辉而且不脆弱,能够为了断尽烦恼而正确地入定。对于任何一项他为了以证智亲自证得而将心倾向的、应当证得的法,只要具备相应的条件,他就能在那个领域获得现证的能力。」——应该知道,这部经就是《增上心经》。显示巴利原文
‘‘Evameva kho, bhikkhave, adhicittamanuyuttena…pe… samādhiyati āsavānaṃ khayāya. Yassa yassa ca abhiññā sacchi karaṇīyassa dhammassa cittaṃ abhininnāmeti abhiññā sacchi kiriyāya, tatra tatreva sakkhibhabbataṃ pāpuṇāti sati sati āyatane’’ti (a. ni. 3.103).
应知此经是《清凉经》。显示巴利原文
Idaṃ suttaṃ nti veditabbaṃ.
比丘们,如果一个比丘具备六种能力,他就能亲身证得最高的清凉境界。是哪六种呢?比丘们,是这样的:当需要克制心的时候,他就能克制住心;当需要激励心的时候,他就能激励起心;当需要让心欢喜的时候,他就能让心欢喜起来;当需要放下心的时候,他就能放下心;他一心向往殊胜微妙的境界,乐于证入涅槃。比丘们,只要具备这六种能力,比丘就能亲身证得最高的清凉境界。显示巴利原文
‘‘Chahi, bhikkhave, dhammehi samannāgato bhikkhu bhabbo anuttaraṃ sītibhāvaṃ sacchikātuṃ. Katamehi chahi? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu yasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ niggahetabbaṃ, tasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ niggaṇhāti. Yasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ paggahetabbaṃ, tasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ paggaṇhāti. Yasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ sampahaṃsitabbaṃ, tasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ sampahaṃseti. Yasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ ajjhupekkhitabbaṃ, tasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ ajjhupekkhati. Paṇītādhimuttiko ca hoti nibbānābhirato. Imehi kho, bhikkhave, chahi dhammehi samannāgato bhikkhu bhabbo anuttaraṃ sītibhāvaṃ sacchikātu’’nti (a. ni. 6.85).
应知此为该经。显示巴利原文
Idaṃ suttaṃ ti veditabbaṃ.
“诸比丘!同样地,当心沉没的时候,那时不是修习轻安觉支的时候”——这一点在安止善巧的论述中已经说明过了。显示巴利原文
‘‘pana evameva kho, bhikkhave, yasmiṃ samaye līnaṃ cittaṃ hoti, akālo tasmiṃ samaye passaddhisambojjhaṅgassa bhāvanāyā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.234) appanākosallakathāyaṃ dassitameva.
这样,那位瑜伽行者善加掌握了这七种执取善巧,又善加确定了这十种作意善巧之后,就应该凭借这两种善巧的力量,善加执取业处。不过,如果他与导师同住一寺,觉得这样很安适,那就不必如此详细地请教,而应该在善加确定业处之后,精勤修习,获得殊胜,然后再逐步向上请教。如果他想住到别的地方去,那就应该依照上述方法详细请教,反复温习,断除一切疑难之处,然后按照地遍的解释中所说的那样,舍弃不适当的坐卧具,住在适当的精舍,断除小的障碍,接着就应该在厌恶作意中作预备。显示巴利原文
Iti idaṃ sattavidhaṃ uggahakosallaṃ suggahitaṃ katvā idañca dasavidhaṃ manasikārakosallaṃ suṭṭhu vavatthapetvā tena yoginā ubhayakosallavasena kammaṭṭhānaṃ sādhukaṃ uggahetabbaṃ. Sace panassa ācariyena saddhiṃ ekavihāreyeva phāsu hoti, evaṃ vitthārena akathāpetvā kammaṭṭhānaṃ suṭṭhu vavatthapetvā kammaṭṭhānaṃ anuyujjantena visesaṃ labhitvā uparūpari kathāpetabbaṃ. Aññattha vasitukāmena yathāvuttena vidhinā vitthārato kathāpetvā punappunaṃ parivattetvā sabbaṃ gaṇṭhiṭṭhānaṃ chinditvā pathavīkasiṇaniddese vuttanayeneva ananurūpaṃ senāsanaṃ pahāya anurūpe vihāre vasantena khuddakapalibodhupacchedaṃ katvā paṭikkūlamanasikāre parikammaṃ kātabbaṃ.
作预备的人,首先应该在头发上取相。怎么取呢?拔取一根或两根头发,放在手掌中,先确定它的颜色。在剃发的地方观察头发也可以。在水钵或粥钵中观察也可以。见到黑色时,应该作意‘黑色’;见到白色时,应该作意‘白色’;见到黑白相间时,就应该依多数的那一种来作意。就像对头发这样,对于整个‘皮等五处’,也应该这样观察后取相。显示巴利原文
Karontena pana kesesu tāva nimittaṃ gahetabbaṃ. Kathaṃ? Ekaṃ vā dve vā kese luñcitvā hatthatale ṭhapetvā vaṇṇo tāva vavatthapetabbo. Chinnaṭṭhānepi kese oloketuṃ vaṭṭati. Udakapatte vā yāgupatte vā oloketumpi vaṭṭatiyeva. Kāḷakakāle disvā kāḷakāti manasikātabbā . Setakāle setāti. Missakakāle pana ussadavasena manasikātabbā honti. Yathā ca kesesu, evaṃ sakalepi tacapañcake disvāva nimittaṃ gahetabbaṃ.
部分确定论显示巴利原文
Koṭṭhāsavavatthāpanakathā
182 这样取相之后,应该依颜色、形状、方位、处所、界限来确定一切部分,然后依颜色、形状、香、所依、处所这五种方式,从厌恶的角度加以确定。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ nimittaṃ gahetvā sabbakoṭṭhāse vaṇṇasaṇṭhānadisokāsaparicchedavasena vavatthapetvā vaṇṇasaṇṭhānagandhaāsayokāsavasena pañcadhā paṭikkūlato vavatthapetabbā.
这里是对一切部分依次的解说。首先,就自然颜色而言,头发是黑色的,像湿木槵子的颜色。就形状而言,是长圆形的,像秤杆的形状。就方位而言,它长在身体的上方。就处所而言,两侧以耳垂为界,前面以额际为界,后面以颈窝为界。显示巴利原文
Tatrāyaṃ sabbakoṭṭhāsesu anupubbakathā. tāva pakativaṇṇena kāḷakā addāriṭṭhakavaṇṇā. Saṇṭhānato dīghavaṭṭalikā tulādaṇḍasaṇṭhānā. Disato uparimadisāya jātā. Okāsato ubhosu passesu kaṇṇacūḷikāhi, purato nalāṭantena, pacchato galavāṭakena paricchinnā. Sīsakaṭāhaveṭhanaṃ allacammaṃ kesānaṃ okāso. Paricchedato kesā sīsaveṭhanacamme vīhaggamattaṃ pavisitvā patiṭṭhitena heṭṭhā attano mūlatalena, upari ākāsena, tiriyaṃ aññamaññena paricchinnā, dve kesā ekato natthīti ayaṃ sabhāgaparicchedo. Kesā na lomā, lomā na kesāti evaṃ avasesaekatiṃsakoṭṭhāsehi amissīkatā kesā nāma pāṭiyekko ekakoṭṭhāsoti ayaṃ visabhāgaparicchedo. Idaṃ kesānaṃ vaṇṇādito vavatthāpanaṃ.
183 接下来,我们要从颜色、形状、气味、所依和处所这五个方面,来确定头发等身体各部分的令人厌恶之处。就拿“头发”来说吧:从颜色上看,它是令人厌恶的;从形状上看,是令人厌恶的;从气味上看,是令人厌恶的;从它所依存的源头看,是令人厌恶的;从它生长的处所看,也是令人厌恶的。显示巴利原文
Idaṃ pana nesaṃ vaṇṇādivasena pañcadhā paṭikkūlato vavatthāpanaṃ. Kesā nāmete vaṇṇatopi paṭikkūlā. Saṇṭhānatopi gandhatopi āsayatopi okāsatopi paṭikkūlā.
即使在看起来不错的粥碗或饭碗里,只要见到一点点像头发颜色的东西,人们也会厌恶地说:“这里面混了头发,快拿走!”像这样,头发从颜色上看是令人厌恶的。在夜里吃饭的人,即使只是碰到了形状像阿迦纤维或曼迦羯纤维的头发丝,也同样会感到厌恶。像这样,头发从形状上看也是令人厌恶的。显示巴利原文
Manuññepi hi yāgupatte vā bhattapatte vā kesavaṇṇaṃ kiñci disvā kesamissakamidaṃ haratha nanti jigucchanti. Evaṃ kesā paṭikkūlā. Rattiṃ bhuñjantāpi kesasaṇṭhānaṃ akkavākaṃ vā makacivākaṃ vā chupitvāpi tatheva jigucchanti. Evaṃ paṭikkūlā.
而且,没有涂抹油、没有佩戴花朵、也没有熏香处理的头发,它的气味是极其令人厌恶的;如果把它扔进火里烧,那气味就更难闻了。头发从颜色和形状上看,或许还不那么让人讨厌,但从气味上说,就确实令人厌恶了。这就好比小男孩的粪便,颜色像郁金色,形状也许并不让人讨厌;又好比扔在垃圾堆里的黑狗尸体,颜色像熟透的多罗果,形状像卷起来丢弃的腰鼓,牙齿像善意佛的花蕾。这两样东西,从颜色和形状上看或许还不那么让人讨厌,但从气味上说,就确实令人厌恶了。同样地,头发从颜色和形状上看或许还不那么让人讨厌,但从气味上说,就确实令人厌恶。显示巴利原文
Telamakkhanapupphadhūpādi saṅkhāravirahitānañca kesānaṃ gandho paramajeguccho hoti. Tato jegucchataro aggimhi pakkhittānaṃ. Kesā hi vaṇṇasaṇṭhānato appaṭikkūlāpi siyuṃ, pana paṭikkūlāyeva. Yathā hi daharassa kumārassa vaccaṃ vaṇṇato haliddivaṇṇaṃ, saṇṭhānatopi haliddipiṇḍasaṇṭhānaṃ. Saṅkāraṭṭhāne chaḍḍitañca uddhumātakakāḷasunakhasarīraṃ vaṇṇato tālapakkavaṇṇaṃ . Saṇṭhānato vaṭṭetvā vissaṭṭhamudiṅgasaṇṭhānaṃ. Dāṭhāpissa sumanamakuḷasadisāti ubhayampi vaṇṇasaṇṭhānato siyā appaṭikkūlaṃ gandhena pana paṭikkūlameva. Evaṃ kesāpi siyuṃ vaṇṇasaṇṭhānato appaṭikkūlā pana paṭikkūlāyevāti.
又比如,在不干净的地方,从村落污水流过的地方长出来的菜叶,对城里人来说是令人厌恶、不能吃的。同样,头发也是从脓、血、尿、粪、胆汁、痰等不净之物中生长出来的,所以是令人厌恶的——这就是头发从“所依”(它所依存生长的源头)来看的厌恶性。显示巴利原文
Yathā pana asuciṭṭhāne gāmanissandena jātāni sūpeyyapaṇṇāni nāgarikamanussānaṃ jegucchāni honti aparibhogāni, evaṃ kesāpi pubbalohitamuttakarīsapittasemhādinissandena jātattā jegucchāti idaṃ nesaṃ pāṭikkulyaṃ.
这些叫做头发的东西,就像在粪堆上长出来的蘑菇一样,是从身体这三十一个部分的聚合体中生出来的。它们就像在坟场、垃圾堆等地方长出来的野菜,又像在排水沟等地方长出来的莲花、睡莲等花朵,因为生长在不干净的地方,所以极其令人厌恶——这就是头发从“处所”(它生长的位置)来看的厌恶性。显示巴利原文
Ime ca kesā nāma gūtharāsimhi uṭṭhitakaṇṇikaṃ viya ekatiṃsakoṭṭhāsarāsimhi jātā. Te susānasaṅkāraṭṭhānādīsu jātasākaṃ viya parikkhādīsu jātakamalakuvalayādipupphaṃ viya ca asuciṭṭhāne jātattā paramajegucchāti idaṃ nesaṃ pāṭikkulyaṃ.
就像了解头发一样,对于身体的所有部分,都应该从颜色、形状、气味、所依、处所这五个方面来了解它们的厌恶性。但是,还应该进一步从颜色、形状、方位、处所、界限这五个方面,把每一个部分都单独地加以确定和区分。显示巴利原文
Yathā ca kesānaṃ, evaṃ sabbakoṭṭhāsānaṃ vaṇṇasaṇṭhānagandhāsayokāsavasena pañcadhā paṭikkūlatā veditabbā. Vaṇṇasaṇṭhānadisokāsaparicchedavasena pana sabbepi visuṃ visuṃ vavatthapetabbā.
184 这里先讲自然颜色:体毛不是像头发那样纯黑不杂,而是黑褐色的。从形状来说,体毛是尖端下垂的多罗树根状。从方位来说,体毛长在身体前后两个方向。从处所来说,除了头发安立的地方和手掌、脚底之外,体毛大多长在其余包裹身体的皮肤上。从界限来说,体毛进入包裹身体的皮肤,深度只有一划痕的程度,就这样安立着。体毛的下方以自己的根底为界,上方以虚空为界,横向以彼此为界——没有两根体毛长在同一个地方的,这是它们的同分界限。异分界限则与头发相似。显示巴利原文
Tattha tāva pakativaṇṇato na kesā viya asambhinnakāḷakā, kāḷapiṅgalā pana honti. Saṇṭhānato onataggā tālamūlasaṇṭhānā. Disato dvīsu disāsu jātā. Okāsato ṭhapetvā kesānaṃ patiṭṭhitokāsañca hatthapādatalāni ca yebhuyyena avasesasarīraveṭhanacamme jātā. Paricchedato sarīraveṭhanacamme likhāmattaṃ pavisitvā patiṭṭhitena heṭṭhā attano mūlatalena, upari ākāsena, tiriyaṃ aññamaññena paricchinnā, dve lomā ekato natthi, ayaṃ nesaṃ sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
185 这是二十个指甲和趾甲的名称。从颜色来说,它们全部是白色的。从形状来说,是鱼鳞状。从方位来说,脚趾甲长在低下的方位,手指甲长在上方的方位,这样长在两个方位。从处所来说,它们安立在手指和脚趾的尖端背部。从界限来说,在两个方位上,指甲和趾甲以指趾尖的肉为界;内侧以指趾背的肉为界;外侧和尖端以虚空为界;横向以彼此为界——没有两个指甲或趾甲长在一起的,这是它们的同分界限。异分界限则如同头发。显示巴利原文
ti vīsatiyā nakhapattānaṃ nāmaṃ. Te sabbepi vaṇṇato setā. Saṇṭhānato macchasakalikasaṇṭhānā. Disato pādanakhā heṭṭhimadisāya, hatthanakhā uparimadisāyāti dvīsu disāsu jātā. Okāsato aṅgulīnaṃ aggapiṭṭhesu patiṭṭhitā. Paricchedato dvīsu disāsu aṅgulikoṭimaṃsehi, anto aṅgulipiṭṭhimaṃsena, bahi ceva agge ca ākāsena, tiriyaṃ aññamaññena paricchinnā, dve nakhā ekato natthi, ayaṃ nesaṃ sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
186 这是具足齿者的三十二颗牙齿。从颜色来说,它们也是白色的。从形状来说,有多种形状。其中,先就下齿列来说:中间的四颗牙齿,形状像依次安放在泥团上的葫芦籽;在它们两边各有一颗,是一根一尖的茉莉花蕾状;再往后各有一颗,是二根二尖的车辕支柱状;再往后各有二颗,是三根三尖的;再往后各有二颗,是四根四尖的。上齿列也是同样的排列方式。从方位来说,牙齿长在上方。从处所来说,它们安立在两个颚骨上。从界限来说,牙齿下方以安立在颚骨上的自己的根底为界,上方以虚空为界,横向以彼此为界——没有两颗牙齿长在一起的,这是它们的同分界限。异分界限则如同头发。显示巴利原文
ti paripuṇṇadantassa dvattiṃsa dantaṭṭhikāni. Tepi vaṇṇato setā. Saṇṭhānato anekasaṇṭhānā. Tesaṃ hi heṭṭhimāya tāva dantapāḷiyā majjhe cattāro dantā mattikāpiṇḍe paṭipāṭiyā ṭhapitaalābubījasaṇṭhānā. Tesaṃ ubhosu passesu ekeko ekamūlako ekakoṭiko mallikamakuḷasaṇṭhāno. Tato ekeko dvimūlako dvikoṭiko yānakaupatthambhinisaṇṭhāno. Tato dve dve timūlā tikoṭikā. Tato dve dve catumūlā catukoṭikāti. Uparimapāḷiyāpi eseva nayo. Disato uparimadisāya jātā. Okāsato dvīsu hanukaṭṭhikesu patiṭṭhitā. Paricchedato heṭṭhā hanukaṭṭhike patiṭṭhitena attano mūlatalena, upari ākāsena, tiriyaṃ aññamaññena paricchinnā, dve dantā ekato natthi, ayaṃ nesaṃ sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
187 这是包裹整个身体而存在的皮。在皮的上方,有名为表皮的黑色、褐色、黄色等颜色的东西,但即使把全身的表皮都刮集起来,也只有枣核大小。然而皮本身从颜色来说只是白色的。当表皮被火焰、打击、武器击打等破坏时,皮的白色就显现出来。从形状来说,皮就是身体的形状。这里是简要说明。显示巴利原文
ti sakalasarīraṃ veṭhetvā ṭhitacammaṃ. Tassa upari kāḷasāmapītādivaṇṇā chavi nāma yā sakalasarīratopi saṅkaḍḍhiyamānā badaraṭṭhimattā hoti. Taco pana vaṇṇato setoyeva. So cassa setabhāvo aggijālābhighātapaharaṇappahārādīhi viddhaṃsitāya chaviyā pākaṭo hoti. Saṇṭhānato sarīrasaṇṭhānova hoti. Ayamettha saṅkhepo.
详细来说:脚趾皮像蚕茧的形状;脚背皮像包缚的凉鞋的形状;小腿皮像包饭的棕榈叶的形状;大腿皮像装满米的长袋的形状;臀部皮像装满水的布滤水囊的形状;背部皮像铺在板上的皮革的形状;腹部皮像铺在琵琶槽上的皮革的形状;胸部皮大多呈四方形;两臂皮像套入箭筒的皮革的形状;手背皮像剃刀鞘的形状,或者像栉袋的形状;手指皮像钥匙袋的形状;颈部皮像包颈布的形状;面部皮像有孔与无孔的巢穴的形状;头部皮像钵袋的形状。显示巴利原文
Vitthārato pana pādaṅgulittaco kosakārakakosasaṇṭhāno. Piṭṭhipādattaco puṭabandhaupāhanasaṇṭhāno. Jaṅghattaco bhattapuṭakatālapaṇṇasaṇṭhāno. Ūruttaco taṇḍulabharitadīghatthavikasaṇṭhāno. Ānisadattaco udakapūritapaṭaparissāvanasaṇṭhāno. Piṭṭhittaco phalakonaddhacammasaṇṭhāno. Kucchittaco vīṇādoṇikonaddhacammasaṇṭhāno. Urattaco yebhuyyena caturassasaṇṭhāno. Ubhayabāhuttaco tūṇironaddhacammasaṇṭhāno. Piṭṭhihatthattaco khurakosasaṇṭhāno, phaṇakatthavikasaṇṭhāno vā. Hatthaṅgulittaco kuñcikākosakasaṇṭhāno. Gīvattaco galakañcukasaṇṭhāno. Mukhattaco chiddāvachiddo kīṭakulāvakasaṇṭhāno. Sīsattaco pattatthavikasaṇṭhānoti.
取皮的瑜伽行者,应该从上唇开始,把智向上输送,首先确定覆盖面部而存在的皮。其次是额骨皮。然后,就像把手伸入放在袋中的钵与袋之间一样,把智送入头骨与头皮之间,分离皮与骨的连结,确定头皮。其次是肩皮。然后顺逆确定右手皮,接着用同样的方法确定左手皮。然后确定背皮,确定之后,顺逆确定右脚皮,接着用同样的方法确定左脚皮。然后应该依次确定生殖器官的皮、腹皮、胸皮、颈皮。接着在颈皮之后,确定下颚皮,到达下唇终点而完成。这样取粗显的部分,细微的部分也会变得明显。从方向来说,皮长在身体前后两个方向。从位置来说,皮覆盖全身而存在。从界限来说,皮的下方以所依止的面为界,上方以虚空为界,这是它的同分界限。异分界限则如同头发一样。显示巴利原文
Tacapariggaṇhakena ca yogāvacarena uttaroṭṭhato paṭṭhāya uparimukhaṃ ñāṇaṃ pesetvā paṭhamaṃ tāva mukhaṃ pariyonandhitvā ṭhitacammaṃ vavatthapetabbaṃ. Tato nalāṭaṭṭhicammaṃ. Tato thavikāya pakkhittapattassa ca thavikāya ca antarena hatthamiva sīsaṭṭhikassa ca sīsacammassa ca antarena ñāṇaṃ pesetvā aṭṭhikena saddhiṃ cammassa ekābaddhabhāvaṃ viyojentena sīsacammaṃ vavatthapetabbaṃ. Tato khandhacammaṃ. Tato anulomena paṭilomena ca dakkhiṇahatthacammaṃ. Atha teneva nayena vāmahatthacammaṃ. Tato piṭṭhicammaṃ taṃ vavatthapetvā anulomena paṭilomena ca dakkhiṇapādacammaṃ. Atha teneva nayena vāmapādacammaṃ. Tato anukkameneva vatthiudarahadayagīvacammāni vavatthapetabbāni. Atha gīvacammānantaraṃ heṭṭhimahanucammaṃ vavatthapetvā adharoṭṭhapariyosānaṃ pāpetvā niṭṭhapetabbaṃ. Evaṃ oḷārikoḷārikaṃ pariggaṇhantassa sukhumampi pākaṭaṃ hoti. Disato dvīsu disāsu jāto. Okāsato sakalasarīraṃ pariyonandhitvā ṭhito. Paricchedato heṭṭhā patiṭṭhitatalena, upari ākāsena paricchinno, ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
188 全身有九百块肉片。从颜色来说,它们全都是红色的,就像甄叔迦花那样。从形状来说,各有不同:小腿肉像包在棕榈叶里的饭团;大腿肉像磨刀石;臀肉像炉灶后边的形状;背肉像棕榈糖饼;两胁的肉像仓库墙壁的孔洞上薄薄涂了一层黏土的样子;乳房肉像揉圆后放在地上的泥团;两臂的肉像两只剥了皮的大老鼠。这样先把握住粗显的部分,那些细微的部分也就变得明显了。从方向来说,肉生长在两个方向。从位置来说,它涂抹、依附在三百多块骨头上。从界限来说,下面以附着在骨堆上的那一面为界,上面以皮肤为界,横向上彼此之间互为边界,这是它的同分界限。它的异分界限则和头发一样。显示巴利原文
nti nava maṃsapesisatāni. Taṃ sabbampi vaṇṇato rattaṃ kiṃsukapupphasadisaṃ. Saṇṭhānato jaṅghapiṇḍikamaṃsaṃ tālapaṇṇapuṭabhattasaṇṭhānaṃ. Ūrumaṃsaṃ nisadapotasaṇṭhānaṃ. Ānisadamaṃsaṃ uddhanakoṭisaṇṭhānaṃ. Piṭṭhimaṃsaṃ tālaguḷapaṭalasaṇṭhānaṃ. Phāsukadvayamaṃsaṃ koṭṭhalikāya kucchiyaṃ tanumattikālepasaṇṭhānaṃ. Thanamaṃsaṃ vaṭṭetvā avakkhittamattikāpiṇḍasaṇṭhānaṃ. Bāhudvayamaṃsaṃ dviguṇaṃ katvā ṭhapitaniccammamahāmūsikasaṇṭhānaṃ. Evaṃ oḷārikoḷārikaṃ pariggaṇhantassa sukhumampi pākaṭaṃ hoti. Disato dvīsu disāsu jātaṃ. Okāsato vīsādhikāni tīṇi aṭṭhisatāni anulimpitvā ṭhitaṃ. Paricchedato heṭṭhā aṭṭhisaṅghāte patiṭṭhitatalena, upari tacena, tiriyaṃ aññamaññena paricchinnaṃ, ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
189 全身有九百条筋。从颜色来说,一切筋都是白色的。从形状来说,则有各种各样的形状。在这些筋当中,从颈部上方开始,有五条大筋绑缚着身体,从前面垂下来;后面有五条;右面有五条;左面有五条。绑缚右手的,也是手的前面五条、后面五条;同样,绑缚左手的也是如此。绑缚右脚的,也是脚的前面五条、后面五条;同样,绑缚左脚的也是如此。这样,就有六十条名为“持身”的大筋绑缚着身体并垂下来。那些也被称为筋。它们全都像百合球茎的形状。其余的筋则覆盖在各处而住。比那些更细的筋,像绳索的形状;再细一些的,像臭蔓的形状;再细一些的,像大琵琶弦的形状;还有的像粗线的形状。手背和脚背上的筋,像鸟足的纹路。头上的筋,像小孩头上戴的网巾。背上的筋,像在太阳底下展开的湿网。其余遍布在各肢体上的筋,像穿在身上的网衣。从方向来说,筋生长在两个方向。从位置来说,它绑缚着全身的骨头而住。从界限来说,下面以三百块骨头的上面为界,上面以接触肉和皮肤而住的地方为界,横向上彼此之间互为边界,这是它们的同分界限。异分界限则和头发一样。显示巴利原文
ti nava nhārusatāni. Vaṇṇato sabbepi nhārū setā. Saṇṭhānato nānāsaṇṭhānā. Etesu hi gīvāya uparimabhāgato paṭṭhāya pañca mahānhārū sarīraṃ vinandhamānā purimapassena otiṇṇā. Pañca pacchimapassena. Pañca dakkhiṇapassena. Pañca vāmapassena. Dakkhiṇahatthaṃ vinandhamānāpi hatthassa purimapassena pañca. Pacchimapassena pañca. Tathā vāmahatthaṃ vinandhamānā. Dakkhiṇapādaṃ vinandhamānāpi pādassa purimapassena pañca. Pacchimapassena pañca. Tathā vāmapādaṃ vinandhamānāpīti evaṃ sarīradhārakā nāma saṭṭhimahānhārū kāyaṃ vinandhamānā otiṇṇā . Ye tipi vuccanti. Te sabbepi kandalamakuḷasaṇṭhānā. Aññe pana taṃ taṃ padesaṃ ajjhottharitvā ṭhitā. Tato sukhumatarā suttarajjukasaṇṭhānā. Aññe tato sukhumatarā pūtilatāsaṇṭhānā, aññe tato sukhumatarā mahāvīṇātantisaṇṭhānā. Aññe thūlasuttakasaṇṭhānā. Hatthapādapiṭṭhīsu nhārū sakuṇapādasaṇṭhānā. Sīse nhārū dārakānaṃ sīsajālakasaṇṭhānā. Piṭṭhiyaṃ nhārū ātape pasāritaallajālasaṇṭhānā. Avasesā taṃtaṃaṅgapaccaṅgānugatā nhārū sarīre paṭimukkajālakañcukasaṇṭhānā. Disato dvīsu disāsu jātā. Okāsato sakalasarīre aṭṭhīni ābandhitvā ṭhitā. Paricchedato heṭṭhā tiṇṇaṃ aṭṭhisatānaṃ upari patiṭṭhitatalehi, upari maṃsacammāni āhacca ṭhitappadesehi, tiriyaṃ aññamaññena paricchinnā, ayaṃ nesaṃ sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
190 除了三十二颗牙骨之外,其余的骨头有:六十四块手骨,六十四块脚骨,六十四块依附在肉上的软骨,两块踵骨,每只脚各有两块踝骨,两块胫骨,一块膝盖骨,一块大腿骨,两块臀骨,十八块脊椎骨,二十四块肋骨,十四块胸骨,一块心骨,两块锁骨,两块肩胛骨,两块上臂骨,各两块前臂骨,七块颈骨,两块腭骨,一块鼻骨,两块眼窝骨,两块耳骨,一块额骨,一块头顶骨,九块头盖骨。这样大约有三百块骨头。从颜色来说,它们全都是白色的。从形状来说,则有各种各样的形状。显示巴利原文
ti ṭhapetvā dvattiṃsa dantaṭṭhīni avasesāni catusaṭṭhi hatthaṭṭhīni, catusaṭṭhi pādaṭṭhīni, catusaṭṭhi maṃsanissitāni muduaṭṭhīni, dve paṇhikaṭṭhīni, ekekasmiṃ pāde dve dve gopphakaṭṭhīni, dve jaṅghaṭṭhīni, ekaṃ jaṇṇukaṭṭhi, ekaṃ ūruṭṭhi, dve kaṭiṭṭhīni, aṭṭhārasa piṭṭhikaṇṭakaṭṭhīni, catuvīsati phāsukaṭṭhīni, cuddasa uraṭṭhīni , ekaṃ hadayaṭṭhi, dve akkhakaṭṭhīni, dve koṭṭaṭṭhīni, dve bāhuṭṭhīni, dve dve aggabāhuṭṭhīni, satta gīvaṭṭhīni, dve hanukaṭṭhīni, ekaṃ nāsikaṭṭhi, dve akkhiṭṭhīni, dve kaṇṇaṭṭhīni, ekaṃ nalāṭaṭṭhi. Ekaṃ muddhaṭṭhi, nava sīsakapālaṭṭhīnīti evaṃ timattāni aṭṭhisatāni, tāni sabbānipi vaṇṇato setāni. Saṇṭhānato nānāsaṇṭhānāni.
在这些骨头当中,脚趾尖端的骨头像迦多迦种子的形状。它后面的中节骨像波罗蜜种子的形状。根节骨像小鼓的形状。脚背骨像压碎了的百合球茎堆的形状。踵骨像单核棕榈种子的形状。踝骨像绑在一起的游戏球的形状。立在踝骨处的小腿骨,像剥了皮的辛提嫩芽的形状。小胫骨像小弓的弧形;大胫骨像干蛇背的形状。膝盖骨像一边缺损的水泡的形状。小腿骨所立的地方,像极其尖锐的牛角的形状。大腿骨像没有削平的斧钺柄的形状,而它依附在臀骨上的那一端,则像游戏球的形状。因此,臀骨依附在腿骨上的那一端,像切去前端的大铁力木果的形状。显示巴利原文
Tattha hi aggapādaṅguliaṭṭhīni katakabījasaṇṭhānāni. Tadanantarāni majjhapabbaṭṭhīni panasaṭṭhisaṇṭhānāni. Mūlapabbaṭṭhīni paṇavasaṇṭhānāni. Piṭṭhipādaṭṭhīni koṭṭitakandalakandarāsisaṇṭhānāni. Paṇhikaṭṭhi ekaṭṭhitālaphalabījasaṇṭhānaṃ. Gopphakaṭṭhīni baddhakīḷāgoḷakasaṇṭhānāni. Jaṅghaṭṭhīnaṃ gopphakaṭṭhīsu patiṭṭhitaṭṭhānaṃ apanītatacasindikaḷīrasaṇṭhānaṃ. Khuddakajaṅghaṭṭhikaṃ dhanukadaṇḍasaṇṭhānaṃ. Mahantaṃ milātasappapiṭṭhisaṇṭhānaṃ. Jaṇṇukaṭṭhi ekato parikkhīṇapheṇakasaṇṭhānaṃ. Tattha jaṅghaṭṭhikassa patiṭṭhitaṭṭhānaṃ atikhiṇaggagosiṅgasaṇṭhānaṃ. Ūruṭṭhi duttacchitavāsiparasudaṇḍasaṇṭhānaṃ. Tassa kaṭiṭṭhimhi patiṭṭhitaṭṭhānaṃ kīḷāgoḷakasaṇṭhānaṃ. Tena kaṭiṭṭhino patiṭṭhitaṭṭhānaṃ aggacchinnamahāpunnāgaphalasaṇṭhānaṃ.
两块臀骨连结在一起,像陶师灶台的形状;如果分开来看,则像铁匠锤索的形状。位于末端的尾闾骨,像倒拿的蛇头形状,上面有七八个孔洞。脊椎骨从内部向上重叠,像头巾盘绕的形状;从外部看,则像一列环形。在它们之间,到处都有两三处棘突,像锯齿的形状。在二十四根肋骨当中,不完全的肋骨像不完全的镰刀形状,完全的肋骨像完全的镰刀形状;全部肋骨合起来看,则像白鸡展开双翼的形状。十四根胸骨像古老战车框架的形状。心骨像勺子头的形状。显示巴利原文
Kaṭiṭṭhīni dvepi ekābaddhāni hutvā kumbhakārikauddhanasaṇṭhānāni. Pāṭiyekkaṃ kammārakūṭayottakasaṇṭhānāni. Koṭiyaṃ ṭhitaṃ ānisadaṭṭhi adhomukhaṃ katvā gahitasappaphaṇasaṇṭhānaṃ, sattaṭṭhaṭṭhānesu chiddāvachiddaṃ. Piṭṭhikaṇṭakaṭṭhīni abbhantarato uparūpari ṭhapitasīsapaṭṭaveṭhakasaṇṭhānāni. Bāhirato vaṭṭanāvaḷisaṇṭhānāni. Tesaṃ antarantarā kakacadantasadisā dve tayo kaṇṭakā honti. Catuvīsatiyā phāsukaṭṭhīsu aparipuṇṇāni aparipuṇṇaasisaṇṭhānāni. Paripuṇṇāni paripuṇṇaasisaṇṭhānāni. Sabbānipi odātakukkuṭassa pasāritapakkhasaṇṭhānāni. Cuddasa uraṭṭhīni jiṇṇasandamānikapañjarasaṇṭhānāni. Hadayaṭṭhi dabbiphaṇasaṇṭhānaṃ.
锁骨像小铜斧柄的形状。肩胛骨像缺了一边的锡兰锄头的形状。上臂骨像镜柄的形状。前臂骨像一对多罗树球茎的形状。腕骨像头巾盘绕的形状。手背骨像压碎了的百合球茎堆的形状。在手指骨中,根节骨像小鼓的形状;中节骨像不完整的波罗蜜种子的形状;前端的节骨像迦多迦种子的形状。显示巴利原文
Akkhakaṭṭhīni khuddakalohavāsidaṇḍasaṇṭhānāni. Koṭṭaṭṭhīni ekato parikkhīṇasīhaḷakuddālasaṇṭhānāni. Bāhuṭṭhīni ādāsadaṇḍakasaṇṭhānāni. Aggabāhuṭṭhīni yamakatālakandasaṇṭhānāni. Maṇibandhaṭṭhīni ekato alliyāpetvā ṭhapitasīsakapaṭṭaveṭhakasaṇṭhānāni. Piṭṭhihatthaṭṭhīni koṭṭitakandalakandarāsisaṇṭhānāni . Hatthaṅgulīsu mūlapabbaṭṭhīni paṇavasaṇṭhānāni. Majjhapabbaṭṭhīni aparipuṇṇapanasaṭṭhisaṇṭhānāni. Aggapabbaṭṭhīni katakabījasaṇṭhānāni.
七个颈骨,形状就像用一根棍子串成一串、再切成圆圈的竹笋。下腭骨像铁匠用的铁锤上系皮带的纽扣;上腭骨像一把削皮的小刀。眼窝和鼻腔的骨头,像已经挖去果肉的嫩多罗核子。额骨像倒扣的贝壳杯。耳根骨像剃头匠的剃刀鞘。在前额和听腔上方缠头巾部位的骨头,像布满皱褶的乳酪膜。头骨像切了斜口的椰子壳。头盖骨则像用线缝起来的破葫芦。显示巴利原文
Satta gīvaṭṭhīni daṇḍena vijjhitvā paṭipāṭiyā ṭhapitavaṃsakaḷīracakkalakasaṇṭhānāni. Heṭṭhimahanukaṭṭhi kammārānaṃ ayokūṭayottakasaṇṭhānaṃ. Uparimaṃ avalekhanasatthakasaṇṭhānaṃ. Akkhikūpanāsakūpaṭṭhīni apanītamiñjataruṇatālaṭṭhisaṇṭhānāni. Nalāṭaṭṭhi adhomukhaṭṭhapitasaṅkhathālakakapālasaṇṭhānaṃ. Kaṇṇacūḷikaṭṭhīni nhāpitakhurakosasaṇṭhānāni. Nalāṭakaṇṇacūḷikānaṃ upari paṭṭabandhanokāse aṭṭhisaṅkuṭitaghaṭapuṇṇapaṭalakhaṇḍasaṇṭhānaṃ. Muddhaṭṭhi mukhacchinnavaṅkanāḷikerasaṇṭhānaṃ. Sīsaṭṭhīni sibbetvā ṭhapitajajjaralābukaṭāhasaṇṭhānāni.
从方向来说,这些骨头分布在身体的上方和下方。从位置来说,它们没有差别地遍布全身。但具体来说,头骨依托在颈骨上,颈骨依托在脊椎骨上,脊椎骨依托在腰骨上,腰骨依托在大腿骨上,大腿骨依托在膝骨上,膝骨依托在小腿骨上,小腿骨依托在踝骨上,踝骨依托在足背骨上。从界限来说,骨头内部以骨髓为界,外部以肉为界,两端则以彼此相接处为界,这是它们共同的界限。至于各自不同的界限,则和头发的情况一样。显示巴利原文
Disato dvīsu disāsu jātāni. Okāsato avisesena sakalasarīre ṭhitāni. Visesena panettha sīsaṭṭhīni givaṭṭhīsu patiṭṭhitāni. Gīvaṭṭhīni piṭṭhikaṇṭakaṭṭhīsu. Piṭṭhikaṇṭakaṭṭhīni kaṭiṭṭhīsu. Kaṭiṭṭhīni ūruṭṭhīsu. Ūruṭṭhīni jaṇṇukaṭṭhīsu. Jaṇṇukaṭṭhīni jaṅghaṭṭhīsu. Jaṅghaṭṭhīni gopphakaṭṭhīsu. Gopphakaṭṭhīni piṭṭhipādaṭṭhīsu patiṭṭhitāni. Paricchedato anto aṭṭhimiñjena, uparito maṃsena, agge mūle ca aññamaññena paricchinnāni, ayaṃ nesaṃ sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
191 这就是骨头内部的骨髓。从颜色来说,它是白色的。从形状来说,在各种大骨头内部的骨髓,形状像放在竹筒里蒸熟的大笋;在细小骨头内部的骨髓,形状像放在竹节里蒸熟的细笋。从方向来说,它分布在身体的上方和下方。从位置来说,它住在骨头的内部。从界限来说,以骨头的内侧底面为界,这是它共同的界限。至于各自不同的界限,则和头发的情况一样。显示巴利原文
nti tesaṃ tesaṃ aṭṭhīnaṃ abbhantaragataṃ miñjaṃ. Taṃ vaṇṇato setaṃ. Saṇṭhānato mahantamahantānaṃ aṭṭhīnaṃ abbhantaragataṃ veḷunāḷiyaṃ pakkhittaseditamahāvettaggasaṇṭhānaṃ. Khuddānukhuddakānaṃ abbhantaragataṃ veḷuyaṭṭhipabbesu pakkhittaseditatanuvettaggasaṇṭhānaṃ. Disato dvīsu disāsu jātaṃ. Okāsato aṭṭhīnaṃ abbhantare patiṭṭhitaṃ. Paricchedato aṭṭhīnaṃ abbhantaratalehi paricchinnaṃ, ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
192 这就是连结在一起的两个肉团。从颜色来说,它是淡红色的,像巴利跋陀迦木的颜色。从形状来说,像小孩子玩的一对球,或者像结在同一个蒂上的两只芒果。从方向来说,它位于身体的上方。从位置来说,它从喉咙底部由一根粗筋出发,向下走一小段后分成两支,连结并围绕着心脏肉而安住。从界限来说,以肾脏以及肾脏的各个部分为限,这是它共同的界限。至于各自不同的界限,则和头发的情况一样。显示巴利原文
nti ekabandhanā dve maṃsapiṇḍikā. Taṃ vaṇṇato mandarattaṃ pāḷibhaddakaṭṭhivaṇṇaṃ. Saṇṭhānato dārakānaṃ yamakakīḷāgoḷakasaṇṭhānaṃ, ekavaṇṭapaṭibaddhaambaphaladvayasaṇṭhānaṃ vā. Disato uparimāya disāya jātaṃ. Okāsato galavāṭakā nikkhantena ekamūlena thokaṃ gantvā dvidhā bhinnena thūlanhārunā vinibaddhaṃ hutvā hadayamaṃsaṃ parikkhipitvā ṭhitaṃ. Paricchedato vakkaṃ vakkabhāgena paricchinnaṃ, ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
193 这就是心脏肉。从颜色来说,它红得像莲花瓣背面的颜色。从形状来说,像去掉外层花瓣后倒过来的莲蕾。外部光滑,内部则像丝瓜果的内部。有智慧的人,心脏略微开放;缺少智慧的人,心脏只是闭合着,像花蕾一样。心脏内部有一个空腔,可以容纳一粒波那伽种子;里面存有半捧血,意界和意识界就依托于它而活动。贪行者的心脏是红色的,嗔行者的是黑色,痴行者的像洗肉水的颜色,寻行者的像野豌豆汤的颜色,信行者的像咖尼咖拉花的颜色,慧行者的心脏则如同洁白、清净、没有浊染、明亮纯净、经过精心琢磨的珍贵摩尼宝珠所发出的光辉。从方向来说,它位于身体的上方。从位置来说,它处在两乳之间的身体内部。从界限来说,以心脏以及心脏的各个部分为限,这是它共同的界限。至于各自不同的界限,则和头发的情况一样。显示巴利原文
nti hadayamaṃsaṃ. Taṃ vaṇṇato rattapadumapattapiṭṭhivaṇṇaṃ. Saṇṭhānato bāhirapattāni apanetvā adhomukhaṃ ṭhapitapadumamakuḷasaṇṭhānaṃ. Bahi maṭṭhaṃ, anto kosātakīphalassa abbhantarasadisaṃ. Paññavantānaṃ thokaṃ vikasitaṃ, mandapaññānaṃ makuḷitameva. Anto cassa punnāgaṭṭhipatiṭṭhānamatto āvāṭako hoti, yattha addhapasatamattaṃ lohitaṃ saṇṭhāti, yaṃ nissāya manodhātu ca manoviññāṇadhātu ca vattanti. Taṃ panetaṃ rāgacaritassa rattaṃ hoti, dosacaritassa kāḷakaṃ, mohacaritassa maṃsadhovanaudakasadisaṃ, vitakkacaritassa kulatthayūsavaṇṇaṃ, saddhācaritassa kaṇikārapupphavaṇṇaṃ, paññācaritassa acchaṃ vippasannaṃ anāvilaṃ paṇḍaraṃ parisuddhaṃ niddhotajātimaṇi viya jutimantaṃ khāyati. Disato uparimāya disāya jātaṃ. Okāsato sarīrabbhantare dvinnaṃ thanānaṃ majjhe patiṭṭhitaṃ. Paricchedato hadayaṃ hadayabhāgena paricchinnaṃ, ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
194 (12)肝脏,是一对肉膜。从颜色来说,它是红色的,带有淡红色调,但不太红,像白睡莲叶背面的颜色。从形状来说,根部是一个整体,到了顶端分成两片,像黑檀叶的形状。对于愚钝的人,它只是一片大叶;对于有智慧的人,则是两三片小叶。从方向来说,它位于身体的上方;从位置来说,它寄住在两乳内部的右侧。从界限来说,肝脏以肝脏的各个部分为界限,这是它共同的界限。至于各自不同的界限,则和头发的情况一样。显示巴利原文
nti yamakamaṃsapaṭalaṃ. Taṃ vaṇṇato rattaṃ paṇḍukadhātukaṃ nātirattakumudassa pattapiṭṭhivaṇṇaṃ. Saṇṭhānato mūle ekaṃ agge yamakaṃ koviḷārapattasaṇṭhānaṃ. Tañca dandhānaṃ ekameva hoti mahantaṃ, paññavantānaṃ dve vā tīṇi vā khuddakāni. Disato uparimāya disāya jātaṃ, okāsato dvinnaṃ thanānaṃ abbhantare dakkhiṇapassaṃ nissāya ṭhitaṃ. Paricchedato yakanaṃ yakanabhāgena paricchinnaṃ, ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
195 (13)“膈膜”——是覆盖在身体内部的一种肉,分为覆盖型和不覆盖型两种。这两种膈膜从颜色来看,都是白色的,像布料碎片的颜色。从形状来看,它们各自长成所在位置的形状。从方向来看,覆盖型膈膜位于上方;不覆盖型膈膜则分布在两个方向。从位置来看,覆盖型膈膜盖在心脏和肾脏上面;不覆盖型膈膜则遍布全身,在皮肤下面覆盖着肌肉。从界限来看,下面以肉为界,上面以皮为界,横向以膈膜自身的范围作为界限,这是它的同分界限。异分界限则与头发一样。显示巴利原文
nti paṭicchannāpaṭicchannabhedato duvidhaṃ pariyonahanamaṃsaṃ. Taṃ duvidhampi vaṇṇato setaṃ dukūlapilotikavaṇṇaṃ. Saṇṭhānato attano okāsasaṇṭhānaṃ. Disato paṭicchannakilomakaṃ uparimāya disāya. Itaraṃ dvīsu disāsu jātaṃ. Okāsato paṭicchannakilomakaṃ hadayañca vakkañca paṭicchādetvā, appaṭicchannakilomakaṃ sakalasarīre cammassa heṭṭhato maṃsaṃ pariyonandhitvā ṭhitaṃ. Paricchedato heṭṭhā maṃsena, upari cammena, tiriyaṃ kilomakabhāgena paricchinnaṃ, ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
196 (14)“脾脏”——是形状像舌头一样的胃部肌肉。从颜色来看,是青色的,像尼均提花的颜色。从形状来看,大约有七个指头那么大,没有系带附着,像黑色小牛的舌头形状。从方向来看,位于上方。从位置来看,在心脏的左侧,附着在胃膜的上侧。如果脾脏被打出来,有情的生命就结束了。从界限来看,以脾脏自身的范围作为界限,这是它的同分界限。异分界限则与头发类似。显示巴利原文
nti udarajivhāmaṃsaṃ. Taṃ vaṇṇato nīlaṃ nigguṇḍipupphavaṇṇaṃ. Saṇṭhānato sattaṅgulappamāṇaṃ abandhanaṃ kāḷavacchakajivhāsaṇṭhānaṃ. Disato uparimāya disāya jātaṃ. Okāsato hadayassa vāmapasse udarapaṭalassa matthakapassaṃ nissāya ṭhitaṃ, yasmiṃ paharaṇappahārena bahinikkhante sattānaṃ jīvitakkhayo hoti. Paricchedato pihakabhāgena paricchinnaṃ, ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
197 (15)“肺”——是分成三十二片肉块的肺脏。从颜色来看,是红色的,像不太熟的乌敦跋罗树果的颜色。从形状来看,像一片切得不平整的厚饼的形状。当体内没有食物和饮料时,肺会被生起的业生火热所侵害,所以像被啃过的干草团一样没有汁液。从方向来看,位于上方。从位置来看,在身体内部两乳之间,覆盖并悬挂在心脏和肝脏的上方。从界限来看,以肺自身的范围作为界限,这是它的同分界限。异分界限则与头发类似。显示巴利原文
nti dvattiṃsamaṃsakhaṇḍappabhedaṃ papphāsamaṃsaṃ. Taṃ vaṇṇato rattaṃ nātipakkaudumbaraphalavaṇṇaṃ. Saṇṭhānato visamacchinnabahalapūvakhaṇḍasaṇṭhānaṃ. Abbhantare asitapītānaṃ abhāve uggatena kammajatejusmānā abbhāhatattā saṃkhāditapalālapiṇḍamiva nirasaṃ nirojaṃ. Disato uparimāya disāya jātaṃ. Okāsato sarīrabbhantare dvinnaṃ thanānaṃ antare hadayañca yakanañca upari chādetvā olambantaṃ ṭhitaṃ. Paricchedato papphāsabhāgena paricchinnaṃ, ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
198 (16)“肠”——男子的肠有三十二手长,妇人的肠有二十八手长,并且有二十一处曲折。从颜色来看,是白色的,像白糖的颜色。从形状来看,像被切掉头部、盘绕在血槽中的蛇的形状。从方向来看,分布在两个方向。从位置来看,上端从喉咙底部开始,下端连接到大便道,所以肠子位于以喉咙底部和大便道为两端的身体内部。从界限来看,以肠自身的范围作为界限,这是它的同分界限。异分界限则与头发类似。显示巴利原文
nti purisassa dvattiṃsahatthā itthiyā aṭṭhavīsatihatthā ekavīsatiyā ṭhānesu obhaggā antavaṭṭi. Tadetaṃ vaṇṇato setaṃ sakkharasudhāvaṇṇaṃ. Saṇṭhānato lohitadoṇiyaṃ ābhujitvā ṭhapitasīsacchinnasappasaṇṭhānaṃ. Disato dvīsu disāsu jātaṃ. Okāsato upari galavāṭake heṭṭhā ca karīsamagge vinibandhattā galavāṭakakarīsamaggapariyante sarīrabbhantare ṭhitaṃ. Paricchedato antabhāgena paricchinnaṃ, ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
199 (17)“肠间膜”——是连接在肠子曲折处的薄膜。从颜色来看,是白色的,像白睡莲根的颜色。从形状来看,也像白睡莲根的形状。从方向来看,分布在两个方向。从位置来看,就像用锄头、斧子等工具干活的人拉工具时,工具上的绳索系住工具的木板;又像擦脚垫子的圆轮之间用线缝合起来,肠间膜也是这样系住肠子的曲折处,使它不会脱离到一边,它分布在二十一个肠子曲折处之间。从界限来看,以肠间膜自身的范围作为界限,这是它的同分界限。异分界限则与头发类似。显示巴利原文
nti antabhogaṭṭhānesu bandhanaṃ. Taṃ vaṇṇato setaṃ dakasītalikamūlavaṇṇaṃ. Saṇṭhānato dakasītalikamūlasaṇṭhānameva. Disato dvīsu disāsu jātaṃ. Okāsato kuddālapharasukammādīni karontānaṃ yantākaḍḍhanakāle yantasuttakamiva yantaphalakāni antabhoge ekato agaḷante ābandhitvā pādapuñchanarajjumaṇḍalakassa antarā saṃsibbitvā ṭhitarajjukā viya ekavīsatiyā antabhogānaṃ antarā ṭhitaṃ. Paricchedato antaguṇabhāgena paricchinnaṃ, ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
200 (18)“胃中物”——是胃里面所有吃下去、喝下去、咀嚼过、品尝过的东西。从颜色来看,就是吃下去的食物本身的颜色。从形状来看,像装了米的洒水囊没有扎紧袋口时的形状。从方向来看,位于上方。从位置来看,在胃里面。显示巴利原文
nti udare bhavaṃ asitapītakhāyitasāyitaṃ. Taṃ vaṇṇato ajjhohaṭāhāravaṇṇaṃ. Saṇṭhānato parissāvane sithilabaddhataṇḍulasaṇṭhānaṃ. Disato uparimāya disāya jātaṃ. Okāsato udare ṭhitaṃ.
所谓胃,就是像从两边挤压湿布时中间鼓起的气泡那样的内脏膜。它的外面光滑,里面则可以说像腐烂的肉包,像污秽的巴梵罗迦花,也可以说像腐烂了的波罗蜜果皮的内部。在那里,有蛆虫、蚯蚓虫、多罗形虫、针口虫、布丝虫与绦虫等三十二种虫类,拥挤杂乱、成群结队地住着。当没有饮食的时候,它们就跳跃叫唤,侵害心脏的肉;当吞咽饮食的时候,它们就张口向上,把最初吞下的两三口食物极快地抢走。胃实在是那些虫的家、厕所、病房与坟墓。在那里,就像旃陀罗村庄门口的污水池,在暑热的时候,降下大粒雨滴,被水冲来的尿、粪、皮、骨、腱等的碎片以及唾、鼻涕、血等种种污物,落入池中汇集,与泥水混杂,过了两三天之后,便生出蛆虫,再被日光的热力蒸迫而沸腾,上面放出泡沫气泡,变成了青黑色,极臭而极可厌;这时那些污物就是走近去看也令人作呕,何况去嗅或去尝呢?同样的,种种饮食,用牙齿的杵来粉碎,用舌头的手来搅转,混杂着唾液,在那一刹那,便已失去了原来的色香及美味等,然后像织布用的浆,像狗的吐泻之物,落下后混杂着胆汁、痰与风等,加上胃中消化热的蒸迫而沸腾,杂着虫类,上面起了一个又一个的泡沫及气泡,成为极污秽、极臭而极可厌的状态;那样的胃中物,听了就让人对饮食生起不快之感,何况用慧眼去观察。又落入胃中的饮食被分为五份:一份给生物虫类吃了,一份给胃中的消化火烧了,一份变成尿,一份变成粪,一份变成液体来增长血肉等。显示巴利原文
nāma ubhato nippīḷiyamānassa allasāṭakassa majjhe sañjātaphoṭakasadisaṃ antapaṭalaṃ, bahi maṭṭhaṃ, anto maṃsakasambupaliveṭhanakiliṭṭhapāvārakapupphakasadisaṃ, kuthitapanasatacassa abbhantarasadisantipi vattuṃ vaṭṭati, yattha takkoṭakā gaṇḍuppādakā tālahīrakā sūcimukhakā paṭatantasuttakā iccevamādidvattiṃsakulappabhedā kimayo ākulabyākulā saṇḍasaṇḍacārino hutvā nivasanti, ye pānabhojanādimhi avijjamāne ullaṅghitvā viravantā hadayamaṃsaṃ abhihananti, pānabhojanādiajjhoharaṇavelāyañca uddhaṃmukhā hutvā paṭhamajjhohaṭe dve tayo ālope turitaturitā viluppanti, yaṃ tesaṃ kimīnaṃ sūtigharaṃ vaccakuṭi gilānasālā susānañca hoti. Yattha seyyathāpi nāma caṇḍālagāmadvāre candanikāya nidāghasamaye thūlaphusitake deve vassante udakena vuyhamānaṃ muttakarīsacammaaṭṭhinhārukhaṇḍakheḷasiṅghāṇikālohitappabhutinānākuṇapajātaṃ nipatitvā kaddamodakāluḷitaṃ dvīhatīhaccayena sañjātakimikulaṃ sūriyātapasantāpavegakuthitaṃ upari pheṇapupphuḷake muñcantaṃ abhinīlavaṇṇaṃ paramaduggandhajegucchaṃ neva upagantuṃ, na daṭṭhuṃ araharūpataṃ āpajjitvā tiṭṭhati, pageva ghāyituṃ vā sāyituṃ vā, evameva nānappakāraṃ pānabhojanādidantamusalasañcuṇṇitaṃ jivhāhatthaparivattitakheḷalālāpalibuddhaṃ taṅkhaṇavigatavaṇṇagandharasādisampadaṃ tantavāyakhalisuvānavamathusadisaṃ nipatitvā pittasemhavātapaliveṭhitaṃ hutvā udaraggisantāpavegakuthitaṃ kimikulākulaṃ uparūpari pheṇapupphuḷakāni muñcantaṃ paramakasambuduggandhajegucchabhāvaṃ āpajjitvā tiṭṭhati. Yaṃ sutvāpi pānabhojanādīsu amanuññatā saṇṭhāti, pageva paññācakkhunā avaloketvā. Yattha ca patitaṃ pānabhojanādi pañcadhā vivekaṃ gacchati, ekaṃ bhāgaṃ pāṇakā khādanti, ekaṃ bhāgaṃ udaraggi jhāpeti, eko bhāgo muttaṃ hoti, eko bhāgo karīsaṃ, eko bhāgo rasabhāvaṃ āpajjitvā soṇitamaṃsādīni upabrūhayati.
它的界限由胃膜及胃中物的部分所界定。这是它的同分界限。异分界限则与发相似。显示巴利原文
Paricchedato udarapaṭalena ceva udariyabhāgena ca paricchinnaṃ. Ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
201 就是粪。它的颜色大多就是所吞食物的颜色。它的形状如同所在处所的形状。它的方向是生于下方。它的位置是住立在熟脏中。所谓熟脏,在肚脐以下、背脊骨下端之间,肠的末端,垂直高八指量,像竹管一样;犹如落在上方地面的雨水渗漏而下,充满下方地面而住立,同样地,任何落入生脏的饮食等,被胃火煮成泡沫糊状,煮熟后像被坐压捣碎般成为细软状态,从肠壁不断渗漏而下,反复挤压,如同将黄泥塞入竹节般堆积而住立。它的界限由熟脏膜及粪的部分所界定,这是它的同分界限。异分界限则如同发一样。显示巴利原文
nti vaccaṃ. Taṃ vaṇṇato yebhuyyena ajjhohaṭāhāravaṇṇameva hoti. Saṇṭhānato okāsasaṇṭhānaṃ. Disato heṭṭhimāya disāya jātaṃ. Okāsato pakkāsaye ṭhitaṃ. nāma heṭṭhānābhi-piṭṭhikaṇṭakamūlānaṃ antare antāvasāne ubbedhena aṭṭhaṅgulamatto veḷunāḷikasadiso, yattha seyyathāpi nāma upari bhūmibhāge patitaṃ vassodakaṃ ogaḷitvā heṭṭhā bhūmibhāgaṃ pūretvā tiṭṭhati, evameva yaṃkiñci āmāsaye patitaṃ pānabhojanādikaṃ udaragginā pheṇuddehakaṃ pakkaṃ pakkaṃ nisadāya pisitamiva saṇhabhāvaṃ āpajjitvā antabilena ogaḷitvā ogaḷitvā omadditvā veḷupabbe pakkhipamānapaṇḍumattikā viya sannicitaṃ hutvā tiṭṭhati. Paricchedato pakkāsayapaṭalena ceva karīsabhāgena ca paricchinnaṃ, ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
202 就是脑,是住立在头盖骨内的髓堆。它的颜色是白色,像白伞菌团那样的颜色。也可以说是未成酪状的坏乳的颜色。它的形状如同所在处所的形状。它的方向是生于上方。它的位置如同依四条缝合线放置合并的四块背肉团一样,合并住立在头盖骨内。它的界限由头盖骨的内底面及脑的部分所界定,这是它的同分界限。异分界限则如同发一样。显示巴利原文
nti sīsakaṭāhabbhantare ṭhitamiñjarāsi. Taṃ vaṇṇato setaṃ ahicchattakapiṇḍavaṇṇaṃ. Dadhibhāvaṃ asampattaṃ duṭṭhakhīravaṇṇantipi vattuṃ vaṭṭati. Saṇṭhānato okāsasaṇṭhānaṃ. Disato uparimāya disāya jātaṃ. Okāsato sīsakaṭāhabbhantare cattāro sibbinimagge nissāya samodhānetvā ṭhapitā cattāro piṭṭhapiṇḍā viya samohitaṃ tiṭṭhati. Paricchedato sīsakaṭāhassa abbhantaratalehi ceva matthaluṅgabhāgena ca paricchinnaṃ , ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
203 就是胆汁,有两种:结胆汁与非结胆汁。其中结胆汁,它的颜色是浓甘草油的颜色;非结胆汁是枯萎阿咖利花的颜色。它们的形状,两者都是所在处所的形状。它们的方向,结胆汁生于上方,其余的生于两方。它们的位置,非结胆汁除了发、毛、齿、爪、无肉之处及干硬皮肤外,如同油滴在水中一样遍布其余身体而住;当它激动时,眼睛变黄,眩晕,肢体颤抖,发痒。结胆汁住立于心肺之间,依肝肉而建立,在如同大酸浆果荚一样的胆囊中;当它激动时,有情发狂,心颠倒,舍弃惭与愧,做不该做的事,说不该说的话,想不该想的念头。它们的界限由胆汁的部分所界定,这是它们的同分界限。异分界限则如同发一样。显示巴利原文
nti dve pittāni baddhapittañca abaddhapittañca. Tattha baddhapittaṃ vaṇṇato bahalamadhukatelavaṇṇaṃ. Abaddhapittaṃ milātaākulipupphavaṇṇaṃ. Saṇṭhānato ubhayampi okāsasaṇṭhānaṃ. Disato baddhapittaṃ uparimāya disāya jātaṃ, itaraṃ dvīsu disāsu jātaṃ. Okāsato abaddhapittaṃ ṭhapetvā kesalomadantanakhānaṃ maṃsavinimuttaṭṭhānañceva thaddhasukkhacammañca udakamiva telabindu avasesasarīraṃ byāpetvā ṭhitaṃ, yamhi kupite akkhīni pītakāni honti, bhamanti, gattaṃ kampati, kaṇḍūyati. Baddhapittaṃ hadayapapphāsānaṃ antare yakanamaṃsaṃ nissāya patiṭṭhite mahākosātakīkosakasadise pittakosake ṭhitaṃ, yamhi kupite sattā ummattakā honti, vipallatthacittā hirottappaṃ chaḍḍetvā akātabbaṃ karonti, abhāsitabbaṃ bhāsanti, acintitabbaṃ cintenti. Paricchedato pittabhāgena paricchinnaṃ, ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
204 就是身体内部约一钵量的痰。它的颜色是白色,像那伽跋罗叶汁的颜色。它的形状是所在处所的形状。它的方位是生于上方。它的位置是住在胃膜。当吞咽饮食等时,犹如水中的苔藓或浮萍,在木块或石块落下时断裂成两半后又再覆盖而住;同样地,当饮食等落下时,它断裂成两半后又再覆盖而住。当它衰弱时,腹部如同熟疮、如同腐烂的鸡蛋般极为可厌,有尸体的臭味;由它上升的臭气,令打嗝与口也恶臭,如同腐烂的尸体。那人应该被告诉说:“走开!你呼出恶臭”。当它增多达到浓厚时,如同厕所的盖板般,在胃膜内部遮蔽尸体的臭味而住。它的界限由痰的部分所限定,这是它的同分界限。异分界限则如同发一样。显示巴利原文
nti sarīrabbhantare ekapatthapūrappamāṇaṃ semhaṃ. Taṃ vaṇṇato setaṃ nāgabalāpaṇṇarasavaṇṇaṃ. Saṇṭhānato okāsasaṇṭhānaṃ. Disato uparimāya disāya jātaṃ. Okāsato udarapaṭale ṭhitaṃ. Yaṃ pānabhojanādiajjhoharaṇakāle seyyathāpi nāma udake sevālapaṇakaṃ kaṭṭhe vā kathale vā patante chijjitvā dvidhā hutvā puna ajjhottharitvā tiṭṭhati, evameva pānabhojanādimhi nipatante chijjitvā dvidhā hutvā puna ajjhottharitvā tiṭṭhati, yamhi ca mandībhūte pakkagaṇḍo viya pūtikukkuṭaṇḍamiva ca udaraṃ paramajegucchaṃ kuṇapagandhaṃ hoti, tato uggatena ca gandhena uddekopi mukhampi duggandhaṃ pūtikuṇapasadisaṃ hoti. So ca puriso apehi duggandhaṃ vāyasīti vattabbataṃ āpajjati, yañca vaḍḍhitvā bahalattamāpannaṃ pidhānaphalakamiva vaccakuṭiyaṃ udarapaṭalassa abbhantareyeva kuṇapagandhaṃ sannirumbhitvā tiṭṭhati. Paricchedato semhabhāgena paricchinnaṃ, ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
205 脓,就是从腐烂的血里产生的。它的颜色像枯黄的叶子;在死尸上,则像腐败变浓的酸粥那种颜色。它的形状,就是它所在那个地方的形状。它的方位,产生于上下两方。关于位置,脓并没有固定的位置,没有一个可以积聚停留的地方。不管身体哪个部位,被木桩、刺、打击、火焰等弄伤,血凝固后化脓,或者长了疮、疖子之类,脓就待在那里。它的界限,由脓本身的范围来限定,这是它的同分界限。异分界限则跟前面讲头发时一样。显示巴利原文
ti pūtilohitavasena pavattapubbaṃ. Taṃ vaṇṇato paṇḍupalāsavaṇṇo. Matasarīre pana pūtibahalācāmavaṇṇo hoti. Saṇṭhānato okāsasaṇṭhāno. Disato dvīsu disāsu hoti. Okāsato pana pubbassa okāso nāma nibaddho natthi, yattha so sannicito tiṭṭheyya, yatra yatra khāṇukaṇṭakapaharaṇaggijālādīhi abhihate sarīrappadese lohitaṃ saṇṭhahitvā paccati, gaṇḍapīḷakādayo vā uppajjanti, tatra tatra tiṭṭhati. Paricchedato pubbabhāgena paricchinno, ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
206 血有两种:积聚血和循环血。其中,积聚血的颜色,像煮熟后变浓的紫胶汁颜色。循环血则像清澈的紫胶汁颜色。两者的形状,都是它们所在那个地方的形状。方位上,积聚血产生于上方;另一种则产生于上下两方。关于位置,除了循环血之外,积聚血遍布整个由业力执持的身体,随着血管网络分布,只是不在头发、体毛、牙齿、指甲等没有肉的地方,也不在坚硬干燥的皮肤上。循环血则充满肝脏下方的区域,大约有一钵的量,在心脏、肾、肺的上方一滴一滴地流淌,滋润着肾、心脏、肝、肺而停留在那里。当肾、心脏等不被循环血滋润时,有情就会感到口渴。它的界限,由血本身的范围来限定,这是它的同分界限。异分界限则跟前面讲头发时一样。显示巴利原文
nti dve lohitāni sannicitalohitañca saṃsaraṇalohitañca. Tattha sannicitalohitaṃ vaṇṇato nipakkabahalalākhārasavaṇṇaṃ. Saṃsaraṇalohitaṃ acchalākhārasavaṇṇaṃ. Saṇṭhānato ubhayampi okāsasaṇṭhānaṃ. Disato sannicitalohitaṃ uparimāya disāya jātaṃ. Itaraṃ dvisu disāsu jātaṃ. Okāsato saṃsaraṇalohitaṃ ṭhapetvā kesalomadantanakhānaṃ maṃsavinimuttaṭṭhānañceva thaddhasukkhacammañca dhamanijālānusārena sabbaṃ upādiṇṇasarīraṃ pharitvā ṭhitaṃ. Sannicitalohitaṃ yakanaṭṭhānassa heṭṭhābhāgaṃ pūretvā ekapatthapūramattaṃ hadayavakkapapphāsānaṃ upari thokaṃ thokaṃ paggharantaṃ vakkahadayayakanapapphāse temayamānaṃ ṭhitaṃ. Tasmiṃ hi vakkahadayādīni atemente sattā pipāsitā honti. Paricchedato lohitabhāgena paricchinnaṃ, ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
207 汗,就是从毛孔等处渗出来的水界。它的颜色像清澈的胡麻油颜色。它的形状,就是它所在那个地方的形状。它的方位,产生于上下两方。关于位置,汗的位置并不固定,它不像血那样一直待在身体里。只有当身体被火的热力、太阳的热力、季节气候变化等弄得燥热时,汗才会从所有头发和体毛的孔隙中流出来,就像一束从水里拔出来、还没有切平的莲须根和白睡莲茎那样。因此,汗的形状也应该根据头发和体毛的孔隙来了解。修习取汗相的瑜伽行者,应当依照汗充满在头发和体毛孔隙中的状态来作意。它的界限,由汗本身的范围来限定,这是它的同分界限。异分界限则跟前面讲头发时一样。显示巴利原文
ti lomakūpādīhi paggharaṇakaāpodhātu. So vaṇṇato vippasannatilatelavaṇṇo. Saṇṭhānato okāsasaṇṭhāno. Disato dvīsu disāsu jāto. Okāsato sedassokāso nāma nibaddho natthi, yattha so lohitaṃ viya sadā tiṭṭheyya. Yadā pana aggisantāpasūriyasantāpautuvikārādīhi sarīraṃ santapati, tadā udakato abbūḷhamattavisamacchinnabhisamuḷālakumudanāḷakalāpo viya sabbakesalomakūpavivarehi paggharati, tasmā tassa saṇṭhānampi kesalomakūpavivarānaññeva vasena veditabbaṃ. Sedapariggaṇhakena ca yoginā kesalomakūpavivare pūretvā ṭhitavaseneva sedo manasi kātabbo. Paricchedato sedabhāgena paricchinno, ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
脂肪,就是凝固的脂膏。它的颜色像切开的姜黄那种颜色。形状方面,先就肥胖的人来说,脂肪在皮肤和肌肉之间,像姜黄色的布片形状;瘦小的人,脂肪则附着在小腿肉、大腿肉、脊椎附近的背肉、胃周围的肉等地方,像折成两层三层的姜黄色布片形状。它的方位,产生于上下两方。它的位置,在肥胖者身上遍布全身;在瘦小者身上,则附着在小腿肉等地方。虽然叫脂肪,但也极其令人厌恶,所以人们不会拿脂肪来做涂头的油,也不用来做鼻油。它的界限,下面以肌肉为界,上面以皮肤为界,横向以脂肪本身的范围为界,这是它的同分界限。异分界限则跟前面讲头发时一样。显示巴利原文
ti thinasineho. So vaṇṇato phālitahaliddivaṇṇo. Saṇṭhānato thūlasarīrassa tāva cammamaṃsantare ṭhapitahaliddivaṇṇadukūlapilotikasaṇṭhāno hoti. Kisasarīrassa jaṅghamaṃsaṃ ūrumaṃsaṃ piṭṭhikaṇṭakanissitaṃ piṭṭhimaṃsaṃ udaravaṭṭimaṃsanti etāni nissāya diguṇatiguṇaṃ katvā ṭhapitahaliddivaṇṇadukūlapilotikasaṇṭhāno. Disato dvīsu disāsu jāto. Okāsato thūlassa sakalasarīraṃ pharitvā kisassa jaṅghamaṃsādīni nissāya ṭhito, yaṃ sinehasaṅkhaṃ gatampi paramajegucchattā neva muddhani telatthāya, na nāsatelādīnamatthāya gaṇhanti. Paricchedato heṭṭhā maṃsena, upari cammena, tiriyaṃ medabhāgena paricchinno, ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
208 泪,就是从眼睛里渗出来的水界。它的颜色,是清澈的胡麻油颜色。它的形状,就是它所在那个地方的形状。它的方位,产生于上方。它的处所,在眼眶里。但是,泪并不像胆汁在胆囊里那样,一直积聚在眼眶中。当有情生起喜悦而大笑,或者生起忧愁而哭泣悲叹,或者吃了不合适的食物,或者眼睛被烟、灰尘等东西刺激到时,由于这些喜悦、忧愁、不合适的食物以及季节气候等原因,泪就在眼眶里产生,充满眼眶而停留,或者流出来。修习取泪相的瑜伽行者,应当依照泪充满眼眶而停留的状态来取相。它的界限,由泪本身的范围来限定,这是它的同分界限。异分界限则跟前面讲头发时一样。显示巴利原文
ti akkhīhi paggharaṇakaāpodhātu. Taṃ vaṇṇato vippasannatilatelavaṇṇaṃ. Saṇṭhānato okāsasaṇṭhānaṃ. Disato uparimāya disāya jātaṃ. Okāsato akkhikūpakesu ṭhitaṃ. Na cetaṃ pittakosake pittamiva akkhikūpakesu sadā sannicitaṃ tiṭṭhati. Yadā pana sattā somanassajātā mahāhasitaṃ hasanti, domanassajātā rodanti paridevanti, tathārūpaṃ vā visamāhāraṃ āhārenti, yadā ca nesaṃ akkhīni dhūmarajapaṃsukādīhi abhihaññanti. Tadā etehi somanassadomanassavisabhāgāhārautūhi samuṭṭhahitvā akkhikūpake pūretvā tiṭṭhati vā paggharati vā. Assupariggaṇhakena ca yoginā akkhikūpake pūretvā ṭhitavaseneva pariggaṇhitabbaṃ. Paricchedato assubhāgena paricchinnaṃ, ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
209 膏,就是融化了的脂膏。它的颜色,像椰子油的颜色;也可以说像撒在粥上面的油那种颜色。它的形状,就像洗澡的时候,脂膏的油滴撒在干净水面上浮动的形态。它的方位,产生于上下两方。它的处所,大多在手掌、手背、脚掌、脚背、鼻孔、额头和肩膀等地方。但是,膏在这些地方并不总是液态的;当受到火的热力、太阳的热力、气候的变化、四界的变化影响时,这些地方也发生变化,这时就像洗澡时脂膏的油滴撒在干净水面上一样,在那些地方浮出膏来。它的界限,由脂肪本身的范围来限定,这是它的同分界限。异分界限则跟前面讲头发时一样。显示巴利原文
ti vilīnasineho. Sā vaṇṇato nāḷikeratelavaṇṇā. Ācāme āsittatelavaṇṇātipi vattuṃ vaṭṭati. Saṇṭhānato nhānakāle pasannaudakassa upari paribbhamantasinehabinduvisaṭasaṇṭhānā. Disato dvīsu disāsu jātā. Okāsato yebhuyyena hatthatalahatthapiṭṭhipādatalapādapiṭṭhināsapuṭanalāṭaaṃsakūṭesu ṭhitā. Na cesā etesu okāsesu sadā vilīnāva hutvā tiṭṭhati. Yadā pana aggisantāpasūriyasantāpautuvisabhāgadhātuvisabhāgehi te padesā usmājātā honti, tadā tattha nhānakāle pasannaudakūpari sinehabinduvisaṭo viya ito cito ca sañcarati. Paricchedato vasābhāgena paricchinnā, ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
210 (29)“唾”,就是口里混着泡沫的水界(水元素)。它的“色”白得像泡沫的颜色。“形”就是它所在位置的那个形状,也可以说像泡沫的形状。“方位”产生于上方。“处所”是从两边脸颊流下来,停在舌头上。不过,唾并不是一直积聚在舌头上的;当有情看见或想起某种饮食时,或者把任何热、苦、辛、咸、酸等味道的东西放到嘴里时,或者心里感到厌倦时,或者对某样东西生起厌恶时,唾就从两边脸颊生出来,流下来停在舌头上。在舌尖的唾是淡的,在舌根的是浓的。把磨过的米、饭或任何其他硬的食物放到嘴里的时候,就像在河堤的沙里挖的小洞,水不断地渗出来一样,唾也不停地流出来,能够滋润食物。“界限”——以唾的部分为限,这是它的“自分的界限”。“他分的界限”则和头发类似。显示巴利原文
ti antomukhe pheṇamissā āpodhātu. So vaṇṇato seto pheṇavaṇṇo. Saṇṭhānato okāsasaṇṭhāno. Pheṇasaṇṭhānotipi vattuṃ vaṭṭati. Disato uparimāya disāya jāto. Okāsato ubhohi kapolapassehi oruyha jivhāya ṭhito. Na cesa ettha sadā sannicito hutvā tiṭṭhati. Yadā pana sattā tathārūpamāhāraṃ passanti vā saranti vā, uṇhatittakaṭukaloṇambilānaṃ vā kiñci mukhe ṭhapenti, yadā vā nesaṃ hadayaṃ āgilāyati, kismiñci deva vā jigucchā uppajjati, tadā kheḷo uppajjitvā ubhohi kapolapassehi oruyha jivhāya saṇṭhāti. Aggajivhāya cesa tanuko hoti, mūlajivhāya bahalo, mukhe pakkhittañca puthukaṃ vā taṇḍulaṃ vā aññaṃ vā kiñci khādanīyaṃ nadīpuline khatakūpakasalilaṃ viya parikkhayaṃ agacchantova temetuṃ samattho hoti. Paricchedato kheḷabhāgena paricchinno, ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisova.
211 (30)“鼻涕”,是从脑部流下来的不净物。它的“色”像嫩多罗果核仁的颜色。“形”就是它所在位置的那个形状。“方位”产生于上方。“处所”是充满在鼻孔里面。不过,鼻涕也不是一直积聚在鼻孔里的;好比有人用荷叶包着凝乳,在下面用刺穿一个小孔,凝乳的清液便从小孔流到外面。同样的,当有情哭泣时,或者因为不适当的饮食和时节导致界发生动乱时,头内部的脑就变成腐败的痰状流下来,经过上腭的开孔流入并充满鼻孔,或者流出鼻孔外面。取鼻涕的瑜伽者,应当依照它充满在鼻孔里的状态来取。“界限”——以鼻涕的部分为限,这是它的“自分的界限”。“他分的界限”则和头发类似。显示巴利原文
ti matthaluṅgato paggharaṇakaasuci. Sā vaṇṇato taruṇatālaṭṭhimiñjavaṇṇā. Saṇṭhānato okāsasaṇṭhānā. Disato uparimāya disāya jātā. Okāsato nāsāpuṭe pūretvā ṭhitā. Na cesā ettha sadā sannicitā hutvā tiṭṭhati, atha kho yathā nāma puriso paduminipatte dadhiṃ bandhitvā heṭṭhā kaṇṭakena vijjheyya, athānena chiddena dadhimuttaṃ gaḷitvā bahi pateyya, evameva yadā sattā rodanti, visabhāgāhārautuvasena vā sañjātadhātukhobhā honti, tadā anto sīsato pūtisemhabhāvamāpannaṃ matthaluṅgaṃ gaḷitvā tālumatthakavivarena otaritvā nāsāpuṭe pūretvā tiṭṭhati vā paggharati vā. Siṅghāṇikā pariggaṇhakena ca yoginā nāsāpuṭe pūretvā ṭhitavaseneva pariggaṇhitabbā. Paricchedato siṅghāṇikābhāgena paricchinnā, ayamassā sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisova.
212 (31)“关节滑液”,是身体关节内部的黏滑污秽物。它的“色”像翅子树树脂的颜色。“形”就是它所在位置的那个形状。“方位”产生于两个方向。“处所”——在八十个关节内部,起着润滑骨节的作用。如果关节滑液少,那么起立、坐下、前进、后退、屈身和伸直的时候,骨头就会发出“格答格答”的声音,像弹指的声音一样响动;即使走一由旬或二由旬的长路,风界(风元素)也会被激动,四肢会发苦。然而,关节滑液多的人,在起坐等动作时,骨头不会发出“格答格答”的声音,即使走长路,风界也不会被激动,四肢也不发苦。“界限”——以关节滑液的部分为限,这是它的“自分的界限”。“他分的界限”则和头发类似。显示巴利原文
ti sarīrasandhīnaṃ abbhantare picchilakuṇapaṃ. Sā vaṇṇato kaṇikāraniyyāsavaṇṇā. Saṇṭhānato okāsasaṇṭhānā. Disato dvīsu disāsu jātā. Okāsato aṭṭhisandhīnaṃ abbhañjanakiccaṃ sādhayamānā asītisatasandhīnaṃ abbhantare ṭhitā. Yassa cesā mandā hoti, tassa uṭṭhahantassa nisīdantassa abhikkamantassa paṭikkamantassa samiñjantassa pasārentassa aṭṭhikāni kaṭakaṭāyanti, accharāsaddaṃ karonto viya sañcarati. Ekayojanadviyojanamattaṃ addhānaṃ gatassa vāyodhātu kuppati, gattāni dukkhanti. Yassa pana bahukā honti, tassa uṭṭhānanisajjādīsu na aṭṭhīni kaṭakaṭāyanti, dīghampi addhānaṃ gatassa na vāyodhātu kuppati, na gattāni dukkhanti. Paricchedato lasikābhāgena paricchinnā, ayamassā sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisova.
213 (32)“尿”——它的“色”像绿豆碱水的颜色。“形”——像倒置的水瓮内部所盛的水的形状。“方位”——产生于下方。“处所”——在膀胱的内部。“膀胱”就是指尿袋。好比投入粪池的无口罗梵那瓮,粪池的液体进入瓮中,却看不出它进入的通道;同样的,尿从身体进入膀胱,也看不出它进入的通道,但排出的通道是明白可见的。当膀胱里的尿充满时,有情便生起“我要小便”的冲动。“界限”——以膀胱的内部和尿的部分为限。这是它的“自分的界限”。“他分的界限”和头发类似。显示巴利原文
nti muttarasaṃ. Taṃ vaṇṇato māsakhārodakavaṇṇaṃ. Saṇṭhānato adhomukhaṭṭhapitaudakakumbhaabbhantaragataudakasaṇṭhānaṃ. Disato heṭṭhimāya disāya jātaṃ. Okāsato vatthissa abbhantare ṭhitaṃ. nāma vatthi puṭo vuccati. Yattha seyyathāpi candanikāya pakkhitte amukhe ravaṇaghaṭe candanikāraso pavisati, na cassa pavisanamaggo paññāyati , evameva sarīrato muttaṃ pavisati, na cassa pavisanamaggo paññāyati, nikkhamanamaggo pana pākaṭo hoti. Yamhi ca muttassa bharite passāvaṃ karomāti sattānaṃ āyūhanaṃ hoti. Paricchedato vatthiabbhantarena ceva muttabhāgena ca paricchinnaṃ, ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisova.
214 就这样,对于头发等各个部分,依照它们的色、形、方位、处所、界限确定之后,依照前面所说的次第,用不过急等十种作意善巧的方法,依色、形、香、所依、处所这五种而作意“厌恶!厌恶!”的人,在最终超越头发等的假名而修习时,好比一个有眼的人,看见一串有三十二种颜色的花穿在一根线上的花环,所有的花不分先后同时显现;同样的,作“此身有发”等观身的人,对于那三十二部分的一切法,也不分先后地同时显现。所以,在之前的《作意善巧论》中说:“初学者对头发作意,他的作意进行之后,到达并停住在这最后的尿的部分为止”。显示巴利原文
Evañhi kesādike koṭṭhāse vaṇṇasaṇṭhānadisokāsaparicchedavasena vavatthapetvā anupubbato nātisīghatotiādinā nayena vaṇṇasaṇṭhānagandhāsayokāsavasena pañcadhā paṭikkūlā paṭikkūlāti manasikaroto paṇṇattisamatikkamāvasāne seyyathāpi cakkhumato purisassa dvattiṃsavaṇṇānaṃ kusumānaṃ ekasuttakaganthitaṃ mālaṃ olokentassa sabbapupphāni apubbāpariyamiva pākaṭāni honti, evameva atthi imasmiṃ kāye kesāti imaṃ kāyaṃ olokentassa sabbe te dhammā apubbāpariyāva pākaṭā honti. Tena vuttaṃ manasikārakosallakathāyaṃ ‘‘ādikammikassa hi kesāti manasikaroto manasikāro gantvā muttanti imaṃ pariyosānakoṭṭhāsameva āhacca tiṭṭhatī’’ti.
如果他把注意力转向外界,那么当所有身体部位都这样清楚地显现时,来来往往走动的人、畜生等等,就不再以有情的形象出现,而是只显现为各个部位的聚合体。而他们所吃下去的食物饮料等,看起来也像是被投进了那个部位聚合体里一样。显示巴利原文
Sace pana bahiddhāpi manasikāraṃ upasaṃharati, athassa evaṃ sabbakoṭṭhāsesu pākaṭībhūtesu āhiṇḍantā manussatiracchānādayo sattākāraṃ vijahitvā koṭṭhāsarāsivaseneva upaṭṭhahanti, tehi ca ajjhohariyamānaṃ pānabhojanādi koṭṭhāsarāsimhi pakkhipamānamiva upaṭṭhāti.
于是,他依照次第舍离等方法,反复作意“厌恶!厌恶!”的时候,安止定就会依次生起。在这个过程中,依据头发等(三十二身分)的颜色、形状、方位、处所、界限而显现的,是“取相”;依据一切行相都作为厌恶而显现的,是“似相”。对于反复修习、大量修习这个似相的人,按照前面说过的方法,就像在不净业处中一样,只以初禅的方式就能生起安止定。显示巴利原文
Athassa anupubbamuñcanādivasena paṭikkūlā paṭikkūlāti punappunaṃ manasikaroto anukkamena appanā uppajjati. Tattha kesādīnaṃ vaṇṇasaṇṭhānadisokāsaparicchedavasena upaṭṭhānaṃ uggahanimittaṃ. Sabbākārato paṭikkūlavasena upaṭṭhānaṃ paṭibhāganimittaṃ. Taṃ āsevato bhāvayato vuttanayena asubhakammaṭṭhānesu viya paṭhamajjhānavaseneva appanā uppajjati.
这种安止定,对于只有一个部分显现的人,或者在一个部分证得安止后就不再对其他部分用功的人,只会生起一个安止定。但对于有许多部分显现的人,或者在一个部分证得禅那后又继续对其他部分用功的人,就会像摩罗迦长老那样,依部分的数目而生起多个初禅。显示巴利原文
Sā yassa ekova koṭṭhāso pākaṭo hoti, ekasmiṃ vā koṭṭhāse appanaṃ patvā puna aññasmiṃ yogaṃ na karoti, tassa ekāva uppajjati. Yassa pana aneke koṭṭhāsā pākaṭā honti, ekasmiṃ vā jhānaṃ patvā puna aññasmiṃpi yogaṃ karoti, tassa mallakattherassa viya koṭṭhāsagaṇanāya paṭhamajjhānāni nibbattanti.
据说,那位具寿(摩罗迦长老)握着长部诵者无畏长老的手,说:“贤友无畏,请你先学这个问题。”然后说:“摩罗迦长老在三十二个部分中,获得了三十二种初禅。如果他夜间入一个禅那、白天入一个禅那,那么要过半个多月,才能又回到原来的那个禅那;如果他每天只入一个禅那,那么要过一个多月,才能又回到原来的那个禅那。”显示巴利原文
So kirāyasmā dīghabhāṇakaabhayattheraṃ hatthe gahetvā ‘‘āvuso abhaya, imaṃ tāva pañhaṃ uggaṇhāhī’’ti vatvā āha – ‘‘mallakatthero dvattiṃsakoṭṭhāsesu dvattiṃsāya paṭhamajjhānānaṃ lābhī. Sace rattiṃ ekaṃ, divā ekaṃ samāpajjati, atirekaddhamāsena puna sampajjati, sace pana devasikaṃ ekaṃ samāpajjati, atirekamāsena puna sampajjatī’’ti.
如此,这个业处虽然依初禅那而成就,但由于是依念力在颜色、形状等方面成就的,所以称为“身至念”。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ paṭhamajjhānavasena ijjhamānampi cetaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ vaṇṇasaṇṭhānādīsu satibalena ijjhanato kāyagatāsatīti vuccati.
精勤修习这身至念的比丘,能够战胜不乐与乐,不乐不能胜过他;他征服、再征服已生起的不乐而安住。能够战胜怖畏恐惧,怖畏恐惧不能胜过他;他征服、再征服已生起的怖畏恐惧而安住。他是能忍耐的人,能忍耐寒冷、炎热、饥饿、口渴、虻虫、蚊虫、风、烈日、爬虫的触恼,能忍耐恶意的说辞、难听的话语,也能忍耐已生起的身体各种感受——那些苦的、剧烈的、粗暴的、尖锐的、不愉悦的、不可意的、能夺命的感受。依头发等(三十二身分)的颜色等差别,能证得四禅那,而达到六通。显示巴利原文
Imañca kāyagatāsatimanuyutto bhikkhu aratiratisaho hoti, na ca naṃ arati sahati, uppannaṃ aratiṃ abhibhuyya abhibhuyya viharati. Bhayabheravasaho hoti, na ca naṃ bhayabheravaṃ sahati, uppannaṃ bhayabheravaṃ abhibhuyya abhibhuyya viharati. Khamo hoti sītassa uṇhassa …pe… pāṇaharānaṃ adhivāsakajātiko hoti (ma. ni. 3.159). Kesādīnaṃ vaṇṇabhedaṃ nissāya catunnaṃ jhānānaṃ lābhī hoti. Cha abhiññā paṭivijjhati (ma. ni. 3.159).
因此,具慧者确实应不放逸地
修习这具有如此众多功德的
身至念。
显示巴利原文 Tasmā have appamatto, anuyuñjetha paṇḍito; Evaṃ anekānisaṃsaṃ, imaṃ kāyagatāsatinti.
以上是身至念的广说部分。显示巴利原文
Idaṃ kāyagatāsatiyaṃ vitthārakathāmukhaṃ.
入出息念论显示巴利原文
Ānāpānassatikathā
215 现在,世尊这样赞叹之后说:“诸比丘,这入出息念定,修习、多修习之后,是寂静、殊胜、纯净、乐的住处;并且每当恶不善法生起,就能当即使其消失、止息。”显示巴利原文
Idāni yaṃ taṃ bhagavatā ‘‘ayampi kho, bhikkhave, ānāpānassatisamādhi bhāvito bahulīkato santo ceva paṇīto ca asecanako ca sukho ca vihāro, uppannuppanne ca pāpake akusale dhamme ṭhānaso antaradhāpeti vūpasametī’’ti evaṃ pasaṃsitvā –
比丘们,应该怎样修习入出息念定、怎样反复修习,才能让它变得寂静、殊胜、纯净,成为安乐的住处,并且每当那些恶的、不善的念头生起时,就能立刻让它们消失、止息呢?
比丘们,关于这个问题,是这样的:比丘去到森林里,或者去到一棵树下,或者去到一间空寂的房屋里。他盘腿坐下,身体保持端正,把念安放在面前。他带着正念吸气,带着正念呼气。
当他吸气长的时候,他清楚地知道:“我吸气长。”当他呼气长的时候,他清楚地知道:“我呼气长。”当他吸气短的时候,他清楚地知道:“我吸气短。”当他呼气短的时候,他清楚地知道:“我呼气短。”
他这样训练自己:“我将要体验着整个身体而吸气。”他这样训练自己:“我将要体验着整个身体而呼气。”
他这样训练自己:“我将要让身体的活动平静下来而吸气。”他这样训练自己:“我将要让身体的活动平静下来而呼气。”
他这样训练自己:“我将要体验着喜而吸气。”他这样训练自己:“我将要体验着喜而呼气。”
他这样训练自己:“我将要体验着乐而吸气。”他这样训练自己:“我将要体验着乐而呼气。”
他这样训练自己:“我将要体验着心的活动而吸气。”他这样训练自己:“我将要体验着心的活动而呼气。”
他这样训练自己:“我将要让心的活动平静下来而吸气。”他这样训练自己:“我将要让心的活动平静下来而呼气。”
他这样训练自己:“我将要体验着心而吸气。”他这样训练自己:“我将要体验着心而呼气。”
他这样训练自己:“我将要让心欢喜起来而吸气。”他这样训练自己:“我将要让心欢喜起来而呼气。”
他这样训练自己:“我将要让心获得定而吸气。”他这样训练自己:“我将要让心获得定而呼气。”
他这样训练自己:“我将要让心解脱而吸气。”他这样训练自己:“我将要让心解脱而呼气。”
他这样训练自己:“我将要随观无常而吸气。”他这样训练自己:“我将要随观无常而呼气。”
他这样训练自己:“我将要随观离贪而吸气。”他这样训练自己:“我将要随观离贪而呼气。”
他这样训练自己:“我将要随观灭而吸气。”他这样训练自己:“我将要随观灭而呼气。”
他这样训练自己:“我将要随观舍遣而吸气。”他这样训练自己:“我将要随观舍遣而呼气。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Kathaṃ bhāvito ca, bhikkhave, ānāpānassatisamādhi kathaṃ bahulīkato santo ceva paṇīto ca asecanako ca sukho ca vihāro, uppannuppanne ca pāpake akusale dhamme ṭhānaso antaradhāpeti vūpasameti? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu araññagato vā rukkhamūlagato vā suññāgāragato vā nisīdati pallaṅkaṃ ābhujitvā ujuṃ kāyaṃ paṇidhāya parimukhaṃ satiṃ upaṭṭhapetvā, so satova assasati sato passasati. Dīghaṃ vā assasanto dīghaṃ assasāmīti pajānāti. Dīghaṃ vā passasanto…pe… rassaṃ vā assasanto…pe… rassaṃ vā passasanto rassaṃ passasāmīti pajānāti. Sabbakāyapaṭisaṃvedī assasissāmīti sikkhati. Sabbakāyapaṭisaṃvedī passasissāmīti sikkhati. Passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ assasissāmīti sikkhati. Passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ passasissāmīti sikkhati. Pītipaṭisaṃvedī… sukhapaṭisaṃvedī… cittasaṅkhārapaṭisaṃvedī… passambhayaṃ cittasaṅkhāraṃ… cittapaṭisaṃvedī… abhippamodayaṃ cittaṃ… samādahaṃ cittaṃ… vimocayaṃ cittaṃ … aniccānupassī… virāgānupassī… nirodhānupassī. Paṭinissaggānupassī assasissāmīti sikkhati. Paṭinissaggānupassī passasissāmīti sikkhatī’’ti –
这样,具足十六个事项的入出息念业处,已经被开示出来了。现在要说明它的修习方法。不过,因为只要依照圣典的注释来解说,就能在一切方面都圆满,所以这里先以圣典的注释作为引导来解说。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ soḷasavatthukaṃ ānāpānassatikammaṭṭhānaṃ niddiṭṭhaṃ. Tassa bhāvanānayo anuppatto. So pana yasmā pāḷivaṇṇanānusāreneva vuccamāno sabbākāraparipūro hoti. Tasmā ayamettha pāḷivaṇṇanāpubbaṅgamo niddeso.
216 在“诸比丘,入出息念定如何修习?”这句话中,首先,“如何”这个提问,是想要用种种方式详细说明入出息念定的修习而提出的;“入出息念定”则是指出被问到的那个法,也就是那个因为想要用种种方式详细说明而被问到的法。在“如何多修习……乃至……令寂止?”这段经文中,道理也是一样的。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ bhāvito ca, bhikkhave, ānāpānassati samādhīti ettha tāva nti ānāpānassatisamādhibhāvanaṃ nānappakārato vitthāretukamyatāpucchā. ti nānappakārato vitthāretukamyatāya puṭṭhadhammanidassanaṃ. Kathaṃ bahulīkato…pe… vūpasametīti etthāpi eseva nayo. Tattha ti uppādito vaḍḍhito vā. ti ānāpānapariggāhikāya satiyā saddhiṃ sampayutto samādhi. Ānāpānassatiyaṃ vā samādhi ānāpānassatisamādhi. ti punappunaṃ kato. ti santo ceva paṇīto ceva. Ubhayattha eva saddena niyamo veditabbo. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Ayañhi yathā asubhakammaṭṭhānaṃ kevalaṃ paṭivedhavasena santañca paṇītañca, oḷārikārammaṇattā pana paṭikkūlārammaṇattā ca ārammaṇavasena neva santaṃ na paṇītaṃ, na evaṃ kenaci pariyāyena asanto vā apaṇīto vā, atha kho ārammaṇasantatāyapi santo vūpasanto nibbuto, paṭivedhasaṅkhātaaṅgasantatāyapi. Ārammaṇapaṇītatāyapi paṇīto atittikaro, aṅgapaṇītatāyapīti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘santo ceva paṇīto cā’’ti.
“纯粹与乐住”:在这里,“纯粹”是指没有掺杂,也就是没有混杂、没有间杂、单独、不共。在这当中,没有以遍作(准备定)或近行(定)而得到的寂静性。从最初的作意开始,它本身的自性就是寂静而且殊胜的,这就是它的意思。但有些人说“纯粹”是没有掺杂、有滋养、以自性本身甘美。这样,这入出息念在每次证得安止定的刹那,能够导致获得身与心的快乐,所以应当知道它是“乐住”。“屡屡生起”是指屡屡没有被镇伏的。“恶”是指罪恶的。“不善法”是指由不善巧(无明)所生的各种法。“即能消灭”是指只用一刹那,就让它消灭、让它被镇伏。“寂止”是指完全平息。或者,因为它是顺决择分,逐渐由圣道增长而达到,断除、令安息,这是所说的意思。显示巴利原文
Asecanako ca sukho ca vihāroti ettha pana nāssa secananti anāsittako abbokiṇṇo pāṭiyekko āveṇiko. Natthi ettha parikammena vā upacārena vā santatā. Ādisamannāhārato pabhuti attano sabhāveneva santo ca paṇīto cāti attho. Keci pana asecanakoti anāsittako ojavanto sabhāveneva madhuroti vadanti. Evaṃ ayaṃ appitappitakkhaṇe kāyikacetasikasukhapaṭilābhāya saṃvattanato ti veditabbo. ti avikkhambhite avikkhambhite. ti lāmake. ti akosallasambhūte dhamme. ti khaṇeneva antaradhāpeti vikkhambheti. ti suṭṭhu upasameti. Nibbedhabhāgiyattā vā anupubbena ariyamaggavuddhippatto samucchindati, paṭippassambhetīti vuttaṃ hoti.
但在这里,这是简略的意思:诸比丘,以什么方式、以什么行相、以什么方法修习入出息念定,以什么方式多修习,而能寂静、殊胜、纯粹与乐住,并且能让已经生起、一再生起的各种恶不善法即时消灭、寂止。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepattho. Bhikkhave, kena pakārena kenākārena kena vidhinā bhāvito ānāpānassatisamādhi kena pakārena bahulīkato santo ceva…pe… vūpasametīti.
217 现在,为了详细说明那个意思,而说“于此,诸比丘”等等。其中,“于此”是指:诸比丘,在此教法中有比丘。因为这里的这个词,显示了能够生起一切种类入出息念定的补特伽罗所依止的教法,并且遮止其他教法具有同样的情形。显示巴利原文
Idāni tamatthaṃ vitthārento ‘‘idha, bhikkhave’’tiādimāha. Tattha ti bhikkhave, imasmiṃ sāsane bhikkhu. Ayañhi ettha saddo sabbappakāraānāpānassatisamādhinibbattakassa puggalassa sannissayabhūtasāsanaparidīpano aññasāsanassa tathābhāvapaṭisedhano ca. Vuttañhetaṃ – idheva, bhikkhave, samaṇo…pe… suññā parappavādā samaṇebhi aññehī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.139). Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘imasmiṃ sāsane bhikkhū’’ti.
“前往阿兰若……或前往空寂之处”这句话,是在说明什么样的坐卧具(住处)才适合修习入出息念定。因为这位比丘的心,长期以来一直在色、声等外境上打转,不愿意安住在入出息念定的所缘上,就像一头被套上车的野牛,只会往错误的方向乱跑。所以,打个比方:牧牛人想要驯服一头喝野母牛奶长大的野牛犊,就会把它从母牛身边带开,在一边打下大木桩,用绳子把它拴在上面。那头牛犊向这边那边拼命挣扎,却逃不掉,最后就会靠近那根柱子坐下或躺下。同样地,这位比丘想要调伏那颗长期以来被色、声等外境滋味喂养大的恶心,也应该从色、声等外境中离开,进入阿兰若,或者前往树下,或者前往空寂之处,在那里用正念的绳子,把心拴在入出息念这根柱子上。这样一来,他的心即使向这边那边挣扎,也找不到以前习惯的那些外境,无法挣断正念的绳子跑掉,就会以近行定与安止定的方式,靠近这个所缘而安坐下来、安躺下来。所以古人说:显示巴利原文
ti idamassa ānāpānassatisamādhibhāvanānurūpasenāsanapariggahaparidīpanaṃ. Imassa hi bhikkhuno dīgharattaṃ rūpādīsu ārammaṇesu anuvisaṭaṃ cittaṃ ānāpānassatisamādhiārammaṇaṃ abhiruhituṃ na icchati, kūṭagoṇayuttaratho viya uppathameva dhāvati. Tasmā seyyathāpi nāma gopo kūṭadhenuyā sabbaṃ khīraṃ pivitvā vaḍḍhitaṃ kūṭavacchaṃ dametukāmo dhenuto apanetvā ekamante mahantaṃ thambhaṃ nikhaṇitvā tattha yottena bandheyya, athassa so vaccho ito cito ca vipphanditvā palāyituṃ asakkonto tameva thambhaṃ upanisīdeyya vā upanipajjeyya vā, evameva imināpi bhikkhunā dīgharattaṃ rūpārammaṇādirasapānavaḍḍhitaṃ duṭṭhacittaṃ dametukāmena rūpādiārammaṇato apanetvā araññaṃ vā…pe… suññāgāraṃ vā pavesetvā tattha assāsapassāsathambhe satiyottena bandhitabbaṃ. Evamassa taṃ cittaṃ ito cito ca vipphanditvāpi pubbe āciṇṇārammaṇaṃ alabhamānaṃ satiyottaṃ chinditvā palāyituṃ asakkontaṃ tamevārammaṇaṃ upacārappanāvasena upanisīdati ceva upanipajjati ca. Tenāhu porāṇā –
「犹如世间调牛犊,系于柱上令驯服;
如是应以念为所缘,牢固系缚自己的心。」
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yathā thambhe nibandheyya, vacchaṃ damaṃ naro idha; Bandheyyevaṃ sakaṃ cittaṃ, satiyārammaṇe daḷha’’nti. (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.165; dī. ni. aṭṭha. 3.374; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.107);
这样,这种坐卧具对他来说,就是适合修习的。所以说:“这是在说明他如何把握适合修习入出息念定的坐卧具。”显示巴利原文
Evamassetaṃ senāsanaṃ bhāvanānurūpaṃ hoti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘idamassa ānāpānassatisamādhibhāvanānurūpasenāsanapariggahaparidīpana’’nti.
再者,这个入出息念业处,在一切业处的分类中居于首位,是一切知佛陀、辟支佛以及佛陀的声闻弟子们证得殊胜成就与现法安乐住的基础。如果不舍弃充满男人、女人、大象、马匹等声音喧闹的村落边缘地带,就不容易修习成功。显示巴利原文
Atha vā yasmā idaṃ kammaṭṭhānappabhede muddhabhūtaṃ sabbaññubuddhapaccekabuddhabuddhasāvakānaṃ visesādhigamadiṭṭhadhammasukhavihārapadaṭṭhānaṃ ānāpānassatikammaṭṭhānaṃ itthipurisahatthiassādisaddasamākulaṃ gāmantaṃ apariccajitvā na sukaraṃ bhāvetuṃ, saddakaṇṭakattā jhānassa. Agāmake pana araññe sukaraṃ yogāvacarena idaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ pariggahetvā ānāpānacatutthajjhānaṃ nibbattetvā tadeva pādakaṃ katvā saṅkhāre sammasitvā aggaphalaṃ arahattaṃ sampāpuṇituṃ. Tasmāssa anurūpasenāsanaṃ dassento bhagavā ‘‘araññagato vā’’tiādimāha.
世尊就像一位地相师。好比地相师看到一块适合建城的地,仔细审察之后,指示说“在这里建城”,等到城市安全建成后,他就会从王族那里获得极大的恭敬。同样地,世尊审察了瑜伽行者合适的坐卧具之后,指示说“应该在这里精勤修习业处”。当那位在那里精勤修习业处的瑜伽行者,渐次证得阿罗汉果时,世尊便获得了“那位世尊确实是正等觉者”这样的大恭敬。显示巴利原文
Vatthuvijjācariyo viya hi bhagavā, so yathā vatthuvijjācariyo nagarabhūmiṃ passitvā suṭṭhu upaparikkhitvā ‘‘ettha nagaraṃ māpethā’’ti upadisati, sotthinā ca nagare niṭṭhite rājakulato mahāsakkāraṃ labhati, evameva yogāvacarassa anurūpasenāsanaṃ upaparikkhitvā ‘‘ettha kammaṭṭhānaṃ anuyuñjitabba’’nti upadisati, tato tattha kammaṭṭhānaṃ anuyuttena yoginā kamena arahatte patte ‘‘sammāsambuddho vata so bhagavā’’ti mahantaṃ sakkāraṃ labhati.
而这位比丘,被比喻为豹子。正如大豹王依靠阿兰若中的草丛、树林或山岩潜伏着,捕捉野水牛、羚羊、野猪等兽类;同样地,应该知道,这位在阿兰若等处精勤修习业处的比丘,会渐次证得入流道、一来道、不来道、阿罗汉道以及圣果。因此古人说——显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ pana bhikkhu dīpisadisoti vuccati. Yathā hi mahādīpirājā araññe tiṇagahanaṃ vā vanagahanaṃ vā pabbatagahanaṃ vā nissāya nilīyitvā vanamahiṃsagokaṇṇasūkarādayo mige gaṇhāti, evameva ayaṃ araññādīsu kammaṭṭhānaṃ anuyuñjanto bhikkhu yathākkamena sotāpattisakadāgāmianāgāmiarahattamagge ceva ariyaphalañca gaṇhatīti veditabbo. Tenāhu porāṇā –
犹如名为豹者,潜伏捕捉兽类;
如是佛陀之子,精勤瑜伽观者;
进入阿兰若后,获得最上果。」
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yathāpi dīpiko nāma, nilīyitvā gaṇhatī mige; Tathevāyaṃ buddhaputto, yuttayogo vipassako; Araññaṃ pavisitvāna, gaṇhāti phalamuttama’’nti. (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.165; dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.374; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.107);
因此,世尊为了给他指示适合精进与勤勇之地的阿兰若坐卧具,而说了“去阿兰若”等话语。显示巴利原文
Tenassa parakkamajavayoggabhūmiṃ araññasenāsanaṃ dassento bhagavā ‘‘araññagato vā’’tiādimāha.
218 这里说的「阿兰若」,就像经典里说的:「走出帝柱之外,这一切都是阿兰若」;又比如说:「所谓阿兰若坐卧具,是指至少相距五百弓的地方。」在具有这些特相的各个阿兰若中,修行者应去往任何有远离之乐的阿兰若。「树下」是指去到树的近旁。「空寂之处」是指去到空旷、远离人群的场所。在这里,除了阿兰若与树下之外,去到其余七种坐卧具,也可以称为「去到空寂之处」。显示巴利原文
Tattha ti ‘‘araññanti nikkhamitvā bahi indakhīlā sabbametaṃ arañña’’nti (vibha. 529) ca, ‘‘āraññakaṃ nāma senāsanaṃ pañcadhanusatikaṃ pacchima’’nti (pārā. 654) ca evaṃ vuttalakkhaṇesu araññesu yaṃkiñci pavivekasukhaṃ araññaṃ gato. ti rukkhasamīpaṃ gato. ti suññaṃ vivittokāsaṃ gato. Ettha ca ṭhapetvā araññañca rukkhamūlañca avasesasattavidhasenāsanagatopi suññāgāragatoti vattuṃ vaṭṭati.
这样,为他指明了随顺三季、随顺界行、并且适合修习入出息念的坐卧具之后,为了指示不落入昏沉与掉举的寂静威仪,所以说「坐」。然后为了显示他坐姿的稳固、入出息运行的安乐以及把握所缘的方法,所以说「结跏趺坐」等。其中,「跏趺」是指完全盘腿而坐。「结」是指盘结。「正直其身」是指让上半身正直安立,使十八节脊椎骨的顶端一节一节相接。这样坐的人,他的皮、肉、筋不会弯曲。那些由于它们弯曲为缘而刹那刹那生起的苦受,便不会生起。当这些苦受不生起时,心就能达到一境性,业处不会散乱,得以增长与广大。「置念面前」是指把念安置在业处的面前。或者这样解释:「遍」是把握的意思,「面」是出离的意思,「前」是现起的意思。因此说「面前念」,应知这里面的义理要依照《无碍解道》所说的道理来理解。这里简要地说:就是已把握出离之念。显示巴利原文
Evamassa ututtayānukūlaṃ dhātucariyānukūlañca ānāpānassatibhāvanānurūpaṃ senāsanaṃ upadisitvā alīnānuddhaccapakkhikaṃ santaṃ iriyāpathaṃ upadisanto ti āha. Athassa nisajjāya daḷhabhāvaṃ assāsapassāsānaṃ pavattanasukhataṃ ārammaṇapariggahūpāyañca dassento pallaṅkaṃ ābhujitvātiādimāha. Tattha nti samantato ūrubaddhāsanaṃ. ti bandhitvā. ti uparimasarīraṃ ujukaṃ ṭhapetvā. Aṭṭhārasapiṭṭhikaṇṭake koṭiyā koṭiṃ paṭipādetvā. Evañhi nisīdantassa cammamaṃsanhārūni na paṇamanti. Athassa yā tesaṃ paṇamanappaccayā khaṇe khaṇe vedanā uppajjeyyuṃ, tā na uppajjanti. Tāsu anuppajjamānāsu cittaṃ ekaggaṃ hoti, kammaṭṭhānaṃ na paripatati, vuddhiṃ phātiṃ upagacchati. ti kammaṭṭhānābhimukhaṃ satiṃ ṭhapayitvā. Atha vā ti pariggahaṭṭho. nti niyyānaṭṭho. ti upaṭṭhānaṭṭho. Tena vuccati ‘‘parimukhaṃ sati’’nti evaṃ (paṭi. ma. 1.164) vuttanayenapettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Tatrāyaṃ saṅkhepo, pariggahitaniyyānaṃ satiṃ katvāti.
219 「他具念地吸入,具念地呼出」——这是说,那位比丘这样坐好,并这样现起念之后,不舍弃那个念,只是具念地吸入,具念地呼出,成为念行者。现在为了显示他以哪些行相成为念行者,所以说「吸入长」等。因为这就是对「他具念地吸入,具念地呼出」这句话的解说——显示巴利原文
ti so bhikkhu evaṃ nisīditvā evañca satiṃ upaṭṭhapetvā taṃ satiṃ avijahanto sato eva assasati sato passasati, satokārī hotīti vuttaṃ hoti. Idāni yehākārehi satokārī hoti, te dassetuṃ dīghaṃ vā assasantotiādimāha. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘so satova assasati sato passasatī’’ti etasseva –
「以三十二种方式成为念行者:以长吸入为缘,了知心一境性、不散乱,念便现起。由那个念与那个智,他成为念行者。以长呼出为缘……乃至……以随观舍遣吸入为缘。以随观舍遣呼出为缘,了知心一境性、不散乱,念便现起。由那个念与那个智,他成为念行者。」显示巴利原文
‘‘Bāttiṃsāya ākārehi sato kārī hoti. Dīghaṃ assāsavasena cittassa ekaggataṃ avikkhepaṃ pajānato sati upaṭṭhitā hoti. Tāya satiyā tena ñāṇena sato kārī hoti. Dīghaṃ passāsavasena…pe… paṭinissaggānupassī assāsavasena. Paṭinissaggānupassī passāsavasena cittassa ekaggataṃ avikkhepaṃ pajānato sati upaṭṭhitā hoti. Tāya satiyā tena ñāṇena sato kārī hotī’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.165).
其中,「吸入长」是指引发长的吸入。「吸入」是向外出去的风,「呼出」是向内进入的风——这是这里所说的。然而,它是依照相反的次第出现的。在这里,一切胎生者从母胎出来时,首先是内部的风向外出去,后来外部的风带着细微尘埃进入内部,触到上颚而止息。因此,应先依照这个道理来了知吸入与呼出。显示巴利原文
Tattha ti dīghaṃ vā assāsaṃ pavattayanto. ti bahi nikkhamanavāto. ti anto pavisanavātoti vuttaṃ. pana uppaṭipāṭiyā āgataṃ. Tattha sabbesampi gabbhaseyyakānaṃ mātukucchito nikkhamanakāle paṭhamaṃ abbhantaravāto bahi nikkhamati. Pacchā bāhiravāto sukhumarajaṃ gahetvā abbhantaraṃ pavisanto tāluṃ āhacca nibbāyati. Evaṃ tāva assāsapassāsā veditabbā.
然而,它们的长短,应依时间的长短来理解。譬如,充满空间的水或沙,被称为「长水、长沙,短水、短沙」;同样地,即使是微细分散的吸入与呼出,在象和蛇的身体中,也是缓慢地充满它们那个叫做有身的长时间,又缓慢地出去,因此称为「长」。在狗、兔等身体中,则是快速地充满它们那个叫做有身的短时间,又快速地出去,因此称为「短」。在人类中,有些人像象、蛇等一样,依长时间而有长的吸入与呼出;有些人像狗、兔等一样,依短时间而有短的吸入与呼出。因此,对于他们,应知依长时间而吸入、呼出者为「长」,依短时间而吸入、呼出者为「短」。显示巴利原文
Yā pana tesaṃ dīgharassatā, sā addhānavasena veditabbā. Yathā hi okāsaddhānaṃ pharitvā ṭhitaṃ udakaṃ vā vālikā vā ‘‘dīghamudakaṃ dīghā vālikā, rassamudakaṃ rassā vālikā’’ti vuccati, evaṃ cuṇṇavicuṇṇāpi assāsapassāsā hatthisarīre ca ahisarīre ca tesaṃ attabhāvasaṅkhātaṃ dīghaṃ addhānaṃ saṇikaṃ pūretvā saṇikameva nikkhamanti. Tasmā dīghāti vuccanti. Sunakhasasādīnaṃ attabhāvasaṅkhātaṃ rassaṃ addhānaṃ sīghaṃ pūretvā sīghameva nikkhamanti, tasmā rassāti vuccanti. Manussesu pana keci hatthiahiādayo viya kāladdhānavasena dīghaṃ assasanti ca passasanti ca. Keci sunakhasasādayo viya rassaṃ, tasmā tesaṃ kālavasena dīghamaddhānaṃ nikkhamantā ca pavisantā ca te ‘‘dīghā’’ ittaramaddhānaṃ nikkhamantā ca pavisantā ca ‘‘rassā’’ti veditabbā.
在这里,这位比丘通过九种方式,在长入息、长出息的时候,清楚地知道“我在长入息、我在长出息”。当他这样清楚地知道时,应该明白,他已经通过一种方式完成了身随观念处(将身体作为观察对象的念住修习)的修习。正如经文所说——显示巴利原文
Tatrāyaṃ bhikkhu navahākārehi dīghaṃ assasanto passasanto ca ‘‘dīghaṃ assasāmi, passasāmī’’ti pajānāti. Evaṃ pajānato cassa ekenākārena kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānabhāvanā sampajjatīti veditabbā. Yathāha (paṭi. ma. 1.166) –
“怎样在长入息时,清楚地知道‘我在长入息’?在长出息时,清楚地知道‘我在长出息’?他在被称为‘长’的时间里入息。他在被称为‘长’的时间里出息。他在被称为‘长’的时间里入息和出息。在被称为‘长’的时间里入息和出息时,欲(想要让呼吸更微细的意愿)生起了。因为欲,他在被称为‘长’的时间里入息得更微细;因为欲,他在被称为‘长’的时间里出息得更微细;因为欲,他在被称为‘长’的时间里入息和出息得更微细。因为欲,在被称为‘长’的时间里入息和出息得更微细时,欢悦(喜悦)生起了。因为欢悦,他在被称为‘长’的时间里入息得更微细;因为欢悦,他在被称为‘长’的时间里出息得更微细;因为欢悦,他在被称为‘长’的时间里入息和出息得更微细。因为欢悦,在被称为‘长’的时间里入息和出息得更微细时,心从长的入息出息中脱离出来,舍(平静)得以建立。通过这九种行相(方式),长的入息出息是身。现起(显现出来的对象)是念,随观(跟随观察)是智。身是现起,不是念。念既是现起也是念。用那个念和那个智去随观那个身。因此说‘于身随观身念处之修习’。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Kathaṃ dīghaṃ assasanto dīghaṃ assasāmīti pajānāti. Dīghaṃ passasanto dīghaṃ passasāmīti pajānāti. Dīghaṃ assāsaṃ addhānasaṅkhāte assasati. Dīghaṃ passāsaṃ addhānasaṅkhāte passasati. Dīghaṃ assāsapassāsaṃ addhānasaṅkhāte assasatipi passasatipi. Dīghaṃ assāsapassāsaṃ addhānasaṅkhāte assasatopi passasatopi chando uppajjati. Chandavasena tato sukhumataraṃ dīghaṃ assāsaṃ addhānasaṅkhāte assasati. Chandavasena tato sukhumataraṃ dīghaṃ passāsaṃ…pe… dīghaṃ assāsapassāsaṃ addhānasaṅkhāte assasatipi passasatipi. Chandavasena tato sukhumataraṃ dīghaṃ assāsapassāsaṃ addhānasaṅkhāte assasatopi passasatopi pāmojjaṃ uppajjati. Pāmojjavasena tato sukhumataraṃ dīghaṃ assāsaṃ addhānasaṅkhāte assasati. Pāmojjavasena tato sukhumataraṃ dīghaṃ passāsaṃ…pe… dīghaṃ assāsapassāsaṃ addhānasaṅkhāte assasatipi passasatipi. Pāmojjavasena tato sukhumataraṃ dīghaṃ assāsapassāsaṃ addhānasaṅkhāte assasatopi passasatopi dīghaṃ assāsapassāsā cittaṃ vivattati, upekkhā saṇṭhāti. Imehi navahi ākārehi dīghaṃ assāsapassāsā kāyo. Upaṭṭhānaṃ sati. Anupassanā ñāṇaṃ. Kāyo upaṭṭhānaṃ, no sati. Sati upaṭṭhānañceva sati ca. Tāya satiyā tena ñāṇena taṃ kāyaṃ anupassati. Tena vuccati kāye kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānabhāvanā’’ti.
这个道理在短呼吸的句子里也同样适用。但差别在于:正如那里说“在被称为‘长’的时间里入息”,这里则说“在被称为‘短’的时间里入息”。因此,应该按照短的方式配合着理解,一直到“因此说‘于身随观身念处之修习’”为止。显示巴利原文
Esa nayo rassapadepi. Ayaṃ pana viseso, yathā ettha ‘‘dīghaṃ assāsaṃ addhānasaṅkhāte’’ti vuttaṃ, evamidha ‘‘rassaṃ assāsaṃ ittarasaṅkhāte assasatī’’ti āgataṃ. Tasmā rassavasena yāva ‘‘tena vuccati kāye kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānabhāvanā’’ti, tāva yojetabbaṃ.
就这样,这位通过长时与短时这些方式清楚地知道入息与出息的人,当长入息时,清楚地知道“我在长入息”……乃至……当短出息时,清楚地知道“我在短出息”,应该这样去理解。当他这样清楚地知道时——显示巴利原文
Evaṃ ayaṃ addhānavasena ittaravasena ca imehākārehi assāsapassāse pajānanto dīghaṃ vā assasanto dīghaṃ assasāmīti pajānāti…pe… rassaṃ vā passasanto rassaṃ passasāmīti pajānātīti veditabbo. Evaṃ pajānato cassa –
吸入有长与短,
呼出亦复如是;
四种相转起,
就在比丘鼻端。」(《波罗夷注》2.165)
显示巴利原文 Dīgho rasso ca assāso, Passāsopi ca tādiso; Cattāro vaṇṇā vattanti, Nāsikaggeva bhikkhunoti. (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.165);
220 也就是说:为了让整个入息身的开始、中间、结束都被清楚地知道、被明显地呈现出来,而学习“我将入息”;为了让整个出息身的开始、中间、结束都被清楚地知道、被明显地呈现出来,而学习“我将出息”。这样让它被清楚地知道、明显地呈现出来,他以与智相应的心(带有智慧的心)入息与出息,因此说“学习‘我将入息、我将出息’”。因为有的比丘,在微细分散的入息身或出息身中,只有开始是明显的,中间和结束则不明显,他只能把握开始,在中间和结束便感到疲累;有的比丘,中间是明显的,开始和结束则不明显;有的比丘,结束是明显的,开始和中间则不明显,他只能把握结束,在开始和中间便感到疲累;有的比丘,全部都是明显的,他能把握全部,在任何地方都不感到疲累。为了指示应当成为这样的人,所以(世尊)说:“我学习‘觉知全身而吸入’、‘觉知全身而呼出’。”显示巴利原文
ti sakalassa assāsakāyassa ādimajjhapariyosānaṃ viditaṃ karonto pākaṭaṃ karonto assasissāmīti sikkhati. Sakalassa passāsakāyassa ādimajjhapariyosānaṃ viditaṃ karonto pākaṭaṃ karonto passasissāmīti sikkhati. Evaṃ viditaṃ karonto pākaṭaṃ karonto ñāṇasampayuttacittena assasati ceva passasati ca. Tasmā ‘‘assasissāmi passasissāmī’’ti sikkhatīti vuccati. Ekassa hi bhikkhuno cuṇṇavicuṇṇavisaṭe assāsakāye passāsakāye vā ādi pākaṭo hoti, na majjhapariyosānaṃ. So ādimeva pariggahetuṃ sakkoti, majjhapariyosāne kilamati. Ekassa majjhaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti, na ādipariyosānaṃ. Ekassa pariyosānaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti, na ādimajjhaṃ. So pariyosānaṃyeva pariggahetuṃ sakkoti, ādimajjhe kilamati. Ekassa sabbampi pākaṭaṃ hoti, so sabbampi pariggahetuṃ sakkoti, na katthaci kilamati, tādisena bhavitabbanti dassento āha – ‘‘sabbakāyapaṭisaṃvedī assasissāmīti…pe… passasissāmīti sikkhatī’’ti.
在这里,“学”的意思就是如此精勤、努力。或者,对这样修习的人的防护,就是这里的增上戒学(关于戒律的更高学习);对这样修习的人的定,就是增上心学(关于心定的更高学习);对这样修习的人的慧,就是增上慧学(关于智慧的更高学习)。他就在这个所缘上,用这个念、用这个作意,去学、去习、去修、去多作这三学——应该这样理解这里的意义。显示巴利原文
Tattha ti evaṃ ghaṭati vāyamati. Yo vā tathābhūtassa saṃvaro, ayamettha adhisīlasikkhā. Yo tathābhūtassa samādhi, ayaṃ adhicittasikkhā. Yā tathābhūtassa paññā, ayaṃ adhipaññāsikkhāti imā tisso sikkhāyo tasmiṃ ārammaṇe tāya satiyā tena manasikārena sikkhati āsevati bhāveti bahulīkarotīti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo.
为什么经文在这里改用未来时态?因为在之前的阶段,修行者只需要单纯地入息和出息,不应该做其他任何事情。但从这个阶段开始,他就要在智慧的生起等方面下功夫了。所以,经典先用现在时态说“他了知‘我入息’,他了知‘我出息’”,然后为了显示从此以后应该做的智慧生起等行相,就用未来时态的语句来安立经文,说‘我将觉知全身而入息’等等。这一点应该明白。显示巴利原文
Tattha yasmā purimanaye kevalaṃ assasitabbaṃ passasitabbameva, na ca aññaṃ kiñci kātabbaṃ. Ito paṭṭhāya pana ñāṇuppādanādīsu yogo karaṇīyo. Tasmā tattha assasāmīti pajānāti passasāmīti pajānāticceva vattamānakālavasena pāḷiṃ vatvā ito paṭṭhāya kattabbassa ñāṇuppādanādino ākārassa dassanatthaṃ sabbakāyapaṭisaṃvedī assasissāmītiādinā nayena anāgatavacanavasena pāḷi āropitāti veditabbā.
他这样修学:‘我将使粗的身行平静、平息、止息、寂止而吸入;我将使粗的身行平静、平息、止息、寂止而呼出。’在这里,应该这样来理解粗细与平静的关系。这位比丘在先前身心还没有被持取(把握、调伏)的时候,身体和心都是扰动、粗重的。当身心的粗重还没有寂止下来时,他的入息和出息也是粗的,以一种很强的方式在运转,鼻孔好像不够用,他只能靠嘴巴来吸入和呼出。但当他的身体和心已经被持取之后,它们就变得寂静、寂止了。当身心寂止下来时,入息和出息就以微细的方式运转,细到需要去审察‘到底还有没有呼吸’的程度。显示巴利原文
ti oḷārikaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ passambhento paṭippassambhento nirodhento vūpasamento assasissāmi passasissāmīti sikkhati. Tatra evaṃ oḷārikasukhumatā ca passaddhi ca veditabbā. Imassa hi bhikkhuno pubbe apariggahitakāle kāyo ca cittañca sadarathā honti oḷārikā. Kāyacittānaṃ oḷārikatte avūpasante assāsapassāsāpi oḷārikā honti, balavatarā hutvā pavattanti, nāsikā nappahoti, mukhena assasantopi passasantopi tiṭṭhati. Yadā panassa kāyopi cittampi pariggahitā honti, tadā te santā honti vūpasantā. Tesu vūpasantesu assāsapassāsā sukhumā hutvā pavattanti, ‘‘atthi nu kho natthī’’ti vicetabbatākārappattā honti.
打个比方:一个男子跑步之后,或者从山上下来之后,或者把重担从头上放下来站着的时候,他的入息出息是很粗的,鼻孔不够用,只能靠嘴巴来入息出息。但是,当他消除了疲劳,洗了澡、喝了水,把湿布放在心口上,躺在凉荫下的时候,那时他的入息出息就变得很细,细到需要去审察‘还有没有呼吸’的程度。同样地,这位比丘在先前身心还没有被持取的时候,身体和心也是粗而不寂静的,入息出息也粗,变得更有力,甚至不能用鼻子入息出息,必须用嘴巴入息出息。当他的身心已经被持取之后,身心就寂静、寂止了,他的入息出息也变得很微细,细到需要去审察的程度。这是什么原因呢?因为他在先前未持取时,没有‘我使粗的身行平静’这样的转向、作意、如理作意、省察,但在持取时就有了。因此,对他来说,从没有持取到有持取,身行就变得微细了。所以古人说——显示巴利原文
Seyyathāpi purisassa dhāvitvā, pabbatā vā orohitvā, mahābhāraṃ vā sīsato oropetvā ṭhitassa oḷārikā assāsapassāsā honti, nāsikā nappahoti, mukhena assasantopi passasantopi tiṭṭhati. Yadā panesa taṃ parissamaṃ vinodetvā nhatvā ca pivitvā ca allasāṭakaṃ hadaye katvā sītāya chāyāya nipanno hoti, athassa te assāsapassāsā sukhumā honti ‘‘atthi nu kho natthī’’ti vicetabbatākārappattā, evameva imassa bhikkhuno pubbe apariggahitakāle kāyo ca…pe… vicetabbatākārappattā honti. Taṃ kissa hetu? Tathā hissa pubbe apariggahitakāle ‘‘oḷārikoḷārike kāyasaṅkhāre passambhemī’’ti ābhogasamannāhāramanasikārapaccavekkhaṇā natthi, pariggahitakāle pana atthi. Tenassa apariggahitakālato pariggahitakāle kāyasaṅkhāro sukhumo hoti. Tenāhu porāṇā –
“当身与心激动时,它过度地转起;
‘当身不紧张时,它便微细地转起。’
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Sāraddhe kāye citte ca, adhimattaṃ pavattati; Asāraddhamhi kāyamhi, sukhumaṃ sampavattatī’’ti. (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.165);
221 在持取(息)的阶段,身行还是粗的;到了初禅的近行定(接近初禅的定境)时,身行是细的。在初禅近行定时,身行还是粗的;到了初禅(安止定)时,身行是细的。在初禅和第二禅的近行定时,身行是粗的;到了第二禅时,身行是细的。在第二禅和第三禅的近行定时,身行是粗的;到了第三禅时,身行是细的。在第三禅和第四禅的近行定时,身行是粗的;到了第四禅时,身行变得极其微细,甚至达到不再转起的程度。这是长部师和杂部师的见解。显示巴利原文
Pariggahepi oḷāriko, paṭhamajjhānupacāre sukhumo. Tasmimpi oḷāriko, paṭhamajjhāne sukhumo. Paṭhamajjhāne ca dutiyajjhānupacāre ca oḷāriko, dutiyajjhāne sukhumo. Dutiyajjhāne ca tatiyajjhānupacāre ca oḷāriko, tatiyajjhāne sukhumo. Tatiyajjhāne ca catutthajjhānupacāre ca oḷāriko, catutthajjhāne atisukhumo appavattimeva pāpuṇātīti. Idaṃ tāva mataṃ.
然而,中部师则认为:在初禅(安止定)时,身行是粗的;到了第二禅的近行定时,身行是细的。像这样,从较低层次的禅那到更高层次的近行定,身行也变得更细。不过,依据一切论师的共同见解,可以这样总结:在未持取时转起的身行,到了持取时就止息了。在持取时转起的身行,到了初禅近行定时就止息了。在初禅近行定时转起的身行,到了初禅(安止定)时就止息了。在初禅时转起的身行,到了第二禅近行定时就止息了。在第二禅近行定时转起的身行,到了第二禅(安止定)时就止息了。在第二禅时转起的身行,到了第三禅近行定时就止息了。在第三禅近行定时转起的身行,到了第三禅(安止定)时就止息了。在第三禅时转起的身行,到了第四禅近行定时就止息了。在第四禅近行定时转起的身行,到了第四禅(安止定)时就止息了。这是奢摩他(止禅)方面的方法。显示巴利原文
pana paṭhamajjhāne oḷāriko, dutiyajjhānupacāre sukhumoti evaṃ heṭṭhimaheṭṭhimajjhānato uparūparijjhānupacārepi sukhumataramicchanti. Sabbesaññeva pana matena apariggahitakāle pavattakāyasaṅkhāro pariggahitakāle paṭippassambhati. Pariggahitakāle pavattakāyasaṅkhāro paṭhamajjhānupacāre…pe… catutthajjhānupacāre pavattakāyasaṅkhāro catutthajjhāne paṭippassambhati. Ayaṃ tāva nayo.
其次,在观(毗婆舍那)方面:在未持取时转起的身行是粗的,在持取大种(地水火风四大元素)时是细的。在持取大种时,身行还是粗的;在持取所造色(由四大所造的色法)时,是细的。在持取所造色时,身行还是粗的;在持取一切色(全部色法)时,是细的。在持取一切色时,身行还是粗的;在持取无色(无色法,即名法)时,是细的。在持取无色时,身行还是粗的;在持取色与无色(名色分别)时,是细的。在持取色与无色时,身行还是粗的;在持取缘(缘起)时,是细的。在持取缘时,身行还是粗的;在持有因有缘的名色时,是细的。在持有因有缘的名色时,身行还是粗的;在以相(无常、苦、无我三相)为所缘的观时,是细的。而在观智力量虚弱的时候,身行是粗的;在观智力量强盛的时候,身行是细的。在这里,应该依照前面所说的方法,了知前前阶段的身行,是依靠后后阶段的身行而止息的。应当这样来理解这里的粗细与止息。显示巴利原文
pana apariggahe pavatto kāyasaṅkhāro oḷāriko, mahābhūtapariggahe sukhumo. Sopi oḷāriko, upādārūpapariggahe sukhumo. Sopi oḷāriko, sakalarūpapariggahe sukhumo. Sopi oḷāriko, arūpapariggahe sukhumo. Sopi oḷāriko, rūpārūpapariggahe sukhumo. Sopi oḷāriko, paccayapariggahe sukhumo. Sopi oḷāriko, sappaccayanāmarūpapariggahe sukhumo. Sopi oḷāriko, lakkhaṇārammaṇikavipassanāya sukhumo. Sopi dubbalavipassanāya oḷāriko, balavavipassanāya sukhumo. Tattha pubbe vuttanayeneva purimassa purimassa pacchimena pacchimena paṭippassaddhi veditabbā. Evamettha oḷārikasukhumatā ca passaddhi ca veditabbā.
在《无碍解道》(paṭi. ma. 1.171)中,结合诘问与净化,其含义是这样宣说的——显示巴利原文
Paṭisambhidāyaṃ (paṭi. ma. 1.171) panassa saddhiṃ codanāsodhanāhi evamattho vutto –
“什么是‘我将平静身行而入息……我将平静身行而出息’的学习?什么是身行?长的入息与出息属于身体,这些法与身体相关联,就是身行。他学习让那些身行平静下来、止灭、寂止……是什么样的身行让身体弯曲、屈曲、俯曲、倾曲、动摇、震动、移动、颤动?他学习‘我将平静身行而入息’,学习‘我将平静身行而出息’。是什么样的身行让身体不弯曲、不屈曲、不俯曲、不倾曲、不动摇、不震动、不移动、不颤动,变得寂静、微细?他学习‘我将平静身行而入息’,学习‘我将平静身行而出息’。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Kathaṃ passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ assasissāmi…pe… passasissāmīti sikkhati? Katame kāyasaṅkhārā? Dīghaṃ assāsapassāsā kāyikā ete dhammā kāyapaṭibaddhā kāyasaṅkhārā. Te kāyasaṅkhāre passambhento nirodhento vūpasamento sikkhati…pe… yathārūpehi kāyasaṅkhārehi kāyassa ānamanā, vinamanā, sannamanā, paṇamanā, iñjanā, phandanā, calanā, kampanā passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ assasissāmīti sikkhati, passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ passasissāmīti sikkhati. Yathārūpehi kāyasaṅkhārehi kāyassa na ānamanā, na vinamanā, na sannamanā, na paṇamanā, aniñjanā, aphandanā, acalanā, akampanā santaṃ sukhumaṃ passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ assasissāmi passasissāmīti sikkhati.
“像这样,据说他学习:‘我将平静身行而入息’,学习:‘我将平静身行而出息。’如果是这样,那么就没有风的把握与显现,没有入息、出息的显现,没有入出息念的显现,没有入出息念定的显现,智者们既不入那等至,也不从那等至出。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Iti kira passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ assasissāmīti sikkhati. Passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ passasissāmīti sikkhati. Evaṃ sante vātūpaladdhiyā ca pabhāvanā na hoti. Assāsapassāsānañca pabhāvanā na hoti. Ānāpānassatiyā ca pabhāvanā na hoti, ānāpānassatisamādhissa ca pabhāvanā na hoti, na ca naṃ taṃ samāpattiṃ paṇḍitā samāpajjantipi vuṭṭhahantipi.
“像这样,据说他学习:‘我将平静身行而入息、出息。’如果是这样,那么就有风的把握与显现,有入息、出息的显现,有入出息念的显现,有入出息念定的显现,智者们既入那等至,也从那等至出。这像什么呢?”显示巴利原文
‘‘Iti kira passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ assasissāmi passasissāmīti sikkhati. Evaṃ sante vātūpaladdhiyā ca pabhāvanā hoti, assāsapassāsānañca pabhāvanā hoti, ānāpānassatiyā ca pabhāvanā hoti, ānāpānassatisamādhissa ca pabhāvanā hoti, tañca naṃ samāpattiṃ paṇḍitā samāpajjantipi vuṭṭhahantipi. Yathā kathaṃ viya?
“比如敲击铜锣时,最初会生起粗的声音。因为善巧地把握粗声的相、善巧地作意、善巧地省察,即使粗声已经灭去,之后微细的声音就会生起。因为善巧地把握微细声的相、善巧地作意、善巧地省察,即使微细声已经灭去,之后心也以微细声的相为所缘而继续运转。同样地,最初粗的入息出息会生起。因为善巧地把握粗的入息出息的相、善巧地作意、善巧地省察,即使粗的入息出息已经灭去,之后微细的入息出息就会生起。因为善巧地把握微细的入息出息的相、善巧地作意、善巧地省察,即使微细的入息出息已经灭去,之后心也以微细的入息出息的相为所缘而不散乱。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Seyyathāpi kaṃse ākoṭite paṭhamaṃ oḷārikā saddā pavattanti. Oḷārikānaṃ saddānaṃ nimittaṃ sugahitattā sumanasikatattā sūpadhāritattā niruddhepi oḷārike sadde atha pacchā sukhumakā saddā pavattanti. Sukhumakānaṃ saddānaṃ nimittaṃ suggahitattā sumanasikatattā sūpadhāritattā niruddhepi sukhumake sadde atha pacchā sukhumasaddanimittārammaṇatāpi cittaṃ pavattati, evameva paṭhamaṃ oḷārikā assāsapassāsā pavattanti. Oḷārikānaṃ assāsapassāsānaṃ nimittaṃ suggahitattā sumanasikatattā sūpadhāritattā niruddhepi oḷārike assāsapassāse atha pacchā sukhumakā assāsapassāsā pavattanti. Sukhumakānaṃ assāsapassāsānaṃ nimittaṃ suggahitattā sumanasikatattā sūpadhāritattā niruddhepi sukhumake assāsapassāse atha pacchā sukhumaassāsapassāsanimittārammaṇatāpi cittaṃ na vikkhepaṃ gacchati.
如果是这样,那么就有风的把握与显现,有入息、出息的显现,有入出息念的显现,有入出息念定的显现,智者们既入那等至,也从那等至出。平静身行的入息、出息是身,现起是念,随观是智;身是现起而不是念,念既是现起也是念;他以那念与那智随观那身。因此说:‘于身随观身念处之修习。’显示巴利原文
‘‘Evaṃ sante vātūpaladdhiyā ca pabhāvanā hoti, assāsapassāsānañca pabhāvanā hoti, ānāpānassatiyā ca pabhāvanā hoti, ānāpānassatisamādhissa ca pabhāvanā hoti, tañca naṃ samāpattiṃ paṇḍitā samāpajjantipi vuṭṭhahantipi. Passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ assāsapassāsā kāyo, upaṭṭhānaṃ sati, anupassanā ñāṇaṃ, kāyo upaṭṭhānaṃ, no sati, sati upaṭṭhānañceva sati ca, tāya satiyā tena ñāṇena taṃ kāyaṃ anupassati. Tena vuccati kāye kāyānupassanā satipaṭṭhānabhāvanā’’ti.
以上是此处依身随观而说的第一个四法的逐句解释。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ tāvettha kāyānupassanāvasena vuttassa paṭhamacatukkassa anupubbapadavaṇṇanā.
222 不过在这里,正是这第一个四法,是作为初学者的业处来教导的;其余三个四法,则是为那些已经在这个业处上证得禅那的人,依受、心、法随观而说的。因此,一位想要修习这个业处、以入出息第四禅那为近因的观,连同无碍解一起证得阿罗汉果的初学善男子,应该先依照前面所说的方法,完成戒清净等一切事务,然后在前面提到的那样的老师跟前,学习具足五个阶段的业处。显示巴利原文
Yasmā panettha idameva catukkaṃ ādikammikassa kammaṭṭhānavasena vuttaṃ. Itarāni pana tīṇi catukkāni ettha pattajjhānassa vedanācittadhammānupassanāvasena vuttāni. Tasmā idaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ bhāvetvā ānāpānacatutthajjhānapadaṭṭhānāya vipassanāya saha paṭisambhidāhi arahattaṃ pāpuṇitukāmena ādikammikena kulaputtena pubbe vuttanayeneva sīlaparisodhanādīni sabbakiccāni katvā vuttappakārassa ācariyassa santike pañcasandhikaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ uggahetabbaṃ.
这里有五种连接:学习、遍问、现起、安止、相。其中,学习就是学习业处;遍问就是遍问业处;现起就是业处的现起;安止就是业处的安止;相就是业处的相。所谓“如是相”,是说应当省察业处的自性。显示巴利原文
Tatrime pañca sandhayo uggaho, paripucchā, upaṭṭhānaṃ, appanā, lakkhaṇanti. Tattha nāma kammaṭṭhānassa uggaṇhanaṃ. nāma kammaṭṭhānassa paripucchanā. nāma kammaṭṭhānassa upaṭṭhānaṃ. nāma kammaṭṭhānassa appanā. nāma kammaṭṭhānassa lakkhaṇaṃ. ‘‘Evaṃlakkhaṇamidaṃ kammaṭṭhāna’’nti kammaṭṭhānasabhāvūpadhāraṇanti vuttaṃ hoti.
这样学习具足五连接业处的人,自己不会疲劳,也不会扰恼老师。因此,应当让老师教授少部分内容,自己长时间诵习;这样学得具足五连接业处之后,住在老师跟前,或者住在别处如前所说的住所,断除小障碍,吃完饭之后,除去饭后的昏沉,安坐下来,忆念三宝功德让心喜悦,对老师所教的一句也不忘失,然后对这入出息念业处作意。这是作意的规定:显示巴利原文
Evaṃ pañcasandhikaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ uggaṇhanto attanāpi na kilamati, ācariyampi na viheseti. Tasmā thokaṃ uddisāpetvā bahukālaṃ sajjhāyitvā evaṃ pañcasandhikaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ uggahetvā ācariyassa santike vā aññatra vā pubbe vuttappakāre senāsane vasantena upacchinnakhuddakapalibodhena katabhattakiccena bhattasammadaṃ paṭivinodetvā sukhanisinnena ratanattayaguṇānussaraṇena cittaṃ sampahaṃsetvā ācariyuggahato ekapadampi asammuyhantena idaṃ ānāpānassatikammaṭṭhānaṃ manasi kātabbaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ manasikāravidhi –
数,随逐,触,安住,观察;
还灭,遍净,及彼等的各别观。
显示巴利原文 Gaṇanā anubandhanā, phusanā ṭhapanā sallakkhaṇā; Vivaṭṭanā pārisuddhi, tesañca paṭipassanāti.
“数”指的是计算呼吸的次数。“随逐”就是心紧紧跟着呼吸走。“触”是呼吸接触的那个部位。“安住”是心安定下来,止于一处。“观察”就是观照。“还灭”指的是圣道。“遍净”就是圣果。“彼等的各别观”是说对前面这些项目逐一进行省察。显示巴利原文
Tattha ti gaṇanāyeva. ti anuvahanā. ti phuṭṭhaṭṭhānaṃ. ti appanā. ti vipassanā. ti maggo. ti phalaṃ. ti paccavekkhaṇā.
其中,这位初学的善男子应当首先以“数”来作意这个业处。计数的时候,不应低于五,不应超过十,中间不应间断。因为低于五的时候,心会在狭窄处生起而挣扎,就像牛群被关在狭窄的牛栏里一样。如果超过十,心便会依赖于计数。如果中间间断,心便会动摇:“我的业处是否已经达到顶点?”因此,应当避免这些过失来计数。显示巴利原文
Tattha iminā ādikammikena kulaputtena paṭhamaṃ gaṇanāya idaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ manasi kātabbaṃ . Gaṇentena ca pañcannaṃ heṭṭhā na ṭhapetabbaṃ. Dasannaṃ upari na netabbaṃ. Antarā khaṇḍaṃ na dassetabbaṃ. Pañcannaṃ heṭṭhā ṭhapentassa hi sambādhe okāse cittuppādo vipphandati sambādhe vaje sanniruddhagogaṇo viya. Dasannampi upari nentassa gaṇananissitako cittuppādo hoti. Antarā khaṇḍaṃ dassentassa ‘‘sikhāppattaṃ nu kho me kammaṭṭhānaṃ, no’’ti cittaṃ vikampati. Tasmā ete dose vajjetvā gaṇetabbaṃ.
计数的时候,一开始要慢慢地数。就像量谷物的人,装满一筒后说“一”然后倒出来;再装下一筒时,如果看到里面有杂物,就把杂物拣掉,仍然说“一、一”。数“二、二”等也是同样的做法。同样地,这位比丘也应该抓住在吸入和呼出中现起的息,从“一、一”开始,一直数到“十、十”,观察息持续生起的状态来计数。他这样数着,吸入和呼出的息就会变得明显。显示巴利原文
Gaṇentena ca paṭhamaṃ dandhagaṇanāya gaṇetabbaṃ. Dhaññamāpako hi nāḷiṃ pūretvā ‘‘eka’’nti vatvā okirati. Puna pūrento kiñci kacavaraṃ disvā taṃ chaḍḍento ‘‘ekaṃ eka’’nti vadati. Esa nayo dve dvetiādīsu. Evameva imināpi assāsapassāsesu yo upaṭṭhāti, taṃ gahetvā ‘‘ekaṃ eka’’nti ādiṃ katvā yāva ‘‘dasa dasā’’ti pavattamānaṃ pavattamānaṃ upalakkhetvāva gaṇetabbaṃ. Tassa evaṃ gaṇayato nikkhamantā ca pavisantā ca assāsapassāsā pākaṭā honti.
之后,他应该舍弃那种缓慢的、像量谷物者那样的计数方式,改用快速的计数来数。就像熟练的牧牛人,拿一些小石子等放在衣襟里,手里拿着绳子和棍子,清晨到牛栏,拍打牛的背,然后坐在门闩柱头上,对每一头走到门口的牛,投一颗石子并数“一、二”。那些牛在三时(初夜、中夜、后夜)的夜间挤在狭窄空间里很难受,出来时互相拥挤,一群群急速地冲出来,牧牛人就快速地数“三、四、五、十”。同样地,这位比丘按照前面说的方法数息,当吸入和呼出的息变得明显后,息就会快速地反复往来。这时,他知道“它们反复往来”后,不取身体内部和外部出去的息,只取到达门口(鼻端)的息,应该快速地数:“一、二、三、四、五、六;一、二、三、四、五、六、七、八、九、十”。因为在与计数相连的业处中,仅凭计数的力量,心就能变得专一,就像依靠舵的支撑力,把船停在急流中一样。显示巴利原文
Athānena taṃ dandhagaṇanaṃ dhaññamāpakagaṇanaṃ pahāya sīghagaṇanāya gaṇetabbaṃ. Cheko hi gopālako sakkharādayo ucchaṅgena gahetvā rajjudaṇḍahattho pātova vajaṃ gantvā gāvo piṭṭhiyaṃ paharitvā palighatthambhamatthake nisinno dvārappattaṃ dvārappattaṃyeva gāviṃ ekā dveti sakkharaṃ khipitvā gaṇeti. Tiyāmarattiṃ sambādhe okāse dukkhaṃ vutthagogaṇo nikkhamanto nikkhamanto aññamaññaṃ upanighaṃsanto vegena vegena puñjapuñjo hutvā nikkhamati. So vegena vegena ‘‘tīṇi cattāri pañca dasā’’ti gaṇetiyeva, evamimassāpi purimanayena gaṇayato assāsapassāsā pākaṭā hutvā sīghaṃ sīghaṃ punappunaṃ sañcaranti. Tatonena ‘‘punappunaṃ sañcarantī’’ti ñatvā anto ca bahi ca agahetvā dvārappattaṃ dvārappattaṃyeva gahetvā ‘‘eko dve tīṇi cattāri pañca cha. Eko dve tīṇi cattāri pañca cha satta…pe… aṭṭha, nava, dasā’’ti sīghaṃ sīyaṃ gaṇetabbameva. Gaṇanapaṭibaddhe hi kammaṭṭhāne gaṇanabaleneva cittaṃ ekaggaṃ hoti, arittupatthambhanavasena caṇḍasote nāvāṭṭhapanamiva.
当他这样快速地计数时,业处就像不间断地运转一样现起。然后,知道“它不间断地运转”后,不执取身体内部和外部的风,应该用前面说的方式快速地计数。因为跟随入内的风会把心导向内部,内部就像被风击打、充满脂肪一样;跟随出外的风会把心带出去,心就在外面散乱于各种所缘。然而,只有在所触之处(鼻端)安立念而修习的人,修习才能成就。所以说:“不执取内部和外部的风,应该用前面说的方式快速地计数。”显示巴利原文
Tassevaṃ sīghaṃ sīghaṃ gaṇayato kammaṭṭhānaṃ nirantaraṃ pavattaṃ viya hutvā upaṭṭhāti. Atha nirantaraṃ pavattatīti ñatvā anto ca bahi ca vātaṃ apariggahetvā purimanayeneva vegena vegena gaṇetabbaṃ. Anto pavisanavātena hi saddhiṃ cittaṃ pavesayato abbhantaraṃ vātabbhāhataṃ medapūritaṃ viya hoti. Bahi nikkhamanavātena saddhiṃ cittaṃ nīharato bahiddhā puthuttārammaṇe cittaṃ vikkhipati. Phuṭṭhaphuṭṭhokāse pana satiṃ ṭhapetvā bhāventasseva bhāvanā sampajjati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘anto ca bahi ca vātaṃ apariggahetvā purimanayeneva vegena vegena gaṇetabba’’nti.
“那么,这样计数要持续多久呢?”直到不需要计数,念就能安住在入息与出息的所缘上为止。因为计数只是为了截断向外散乱的寻(思维),使念安立在入息与出息的所缘上而已。显示巴利原文
Kīvaciraṃ panetaṃ gaṇetabbanti? Yāva vinā gaṇanāya assāsapassāsārammaṇe sati santiṭṭhati. Bahivisaṭavitakkavicchedaṃ katvā assāsapassāsārammaṇe satisaṇṭhāpanatthaṃyeva hi gaṇanāti.
224 这样用计数作意之后,应当作意“随逐”。所谓随逐,就是舍弃计数,用念不间断地跟随各次入息与出息。而且,那不是以随逐初、中、后的方式来做的。因为对于向外出的风,脐是初,心脏是中,鼻端是后;对于向内入的风,鼻端是初,心脏是中,脐是后。当他随逐那初、中、后时,散乱的心会激动和动摇。如经中所说:显示巴利原文
Evaṃ gaṇanāya manasi katvā manasi kātabbaṃ. nāma gaṇanaṃ paṭisaṃharitvā satiyā nirantaraṃ assāsapassāsānaṃ anugamanaṃ. Tañca kho na ādimajjhapariyosānānugamanavasena. Bahinikkhamanavātassa hi nābhi ādi, hadayaṃ majjhaṃ, nāsikaggaṃ pariyosānaṃ. Abbhantaraṃ pavisanavātassa nāsikaggaṃ ādi, hadayaṃ majjhaṃ nābhi pariyosānaṃ. Tañcassa anugacchato vikkhepagataṃ cittaṃ sāraddhāya ceva hoti iñjanāya ca. Yathāha –
当一个人用正念紧紧跟随着入息的开始、中间和结束阶段时,如果他的心被内在的散乱所干扰,那么他的身体和心都会变得激动、不安、动摇。同样地,当用正念紧紧跟随着出息的开始、中间和结束阶段时,如果他的心被外在的散乱所干扰,那么他的身体和心也都会变得激动、不安、动摇。显示巴利原文
‘‘Assāsādimajjhapariyosānaṃ satiyā anugacchato ajjhattaṃ vikkhepagatena cittena kāyopi cittampi sāraddhā ca honti iñjitā ca phanditā ca. Passāsādimajjhapariyosānaṃ satiyā anugacchato bahiddhā vikkhepagatena cittena kāyopi cittampi sāraddhā ca honti iñjitā ca phanditā cā’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.157).
因此,以随逐方式作意的人,不应该刻意去关注呼吸的初、中、后三个阶段。他应当以触和安置的方式来作意。因为就像计数和随逐的方式一样,并没有脱离触与安置的单独作意。实际上,当他在所触之处计数时,他就是在以计数和触来作意。当他在那里舍弃计数,以正念随逐呼吸,并以安止的方式安置心时,这就叫做以随逐、触与安置来作意。这个道理应该用下面所说的跛子、守门人和锯子的譬喻来理解。显示巴利原文
Tasmā anubandhanāya manasikarontena ādimajjhapariyosānavasena na manasi kātabbaṃ. Apica kho ca ca manasi kātabbaṃ. Gaṇanānubandhanāvasena viya hi phusanāṭhapanāvasena visuṃ manasikāro natthi. Phuṭṭhaphuṭṭhaṭṭhāneyeva pana gaṇento gaṇanāya ca phusanāya ca manasi karoti. Tattheva gaṇanaṃ paṭisaṃharitvā te satiyā anubandhanto, appanāvasena ca cittaṃ ṭhapento anubandhanāya ca phusanāya ca ṭhapanāya ca manasi karotīti vuccati. Svāyamattho vuttapaṅguḷadovārikūpamāhi vuttakakacūpamāya ca veditabbo.
225 这里先说跛子的譬喻:就像一个跛子推动母子游戏的秋千后,就坐在秋千柱的根部,依次看着秋千板来去时的两端和中央,却不用为了看两端和中央而忙来忙去。同样地,这位比丘把正念安立在相的柱根处,推动吸入与呼出的秋千后,就在所触之处以正念随观依次来去的吸入与呼出的初、中、后阶段,并在那里安置心而观察,却不用为了观察它们而忙来忙去。这就是跛子的譬喻。显示巴利原文
Tatrāyaṃ – seyyathāpi paṅguḷo dolāya kīḷataṃ mātāputtānaṃ dolaṃ khipitvā tattheva dolāthambhamūle nisinno kamena āgacchantassa ca gacchantassa ca dolāphalakassa ubho koṭiyo majjhañca passati, na ca ubhokoṭimajjhānaṃ dassanatthaṃ byāvaṭo hoti, evamevāyaṃ bhikkhu sativasena upanibandhanathambhamūle ṭhatvā assāsapassāsadolaṃ khipitvā tattheva nimitte satiyā nisīdanto kamena āgacchantānañca gacchantānañca phuṭṭhaṭṭhāne assāsapassāsānaṃ ādimajjhapariyosānaṃ satiyā anugacchanto tattha ca cittaṃ ṭhapento passati, na ca tesaṃ dassanatthaṃ byāvaṭo hoti, ayaṃ paṅguḷopamā.
226 这是守门人的譬喻:就像一个守门人,他不去审查城内和城外的人们,比如问'你是谁?从哪里来?要去哪里?手里拿什么?',因为那些不是他的职责,他只审查到达门口的人。同样地,这位比丘对进入体内的风和出去体外的风不当作自己的职责,只有到达门口的风才是他的职责。这就是守门人的譬喻。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ pana – seyyathāpi dovāriko nagarassa anto ca bahi ca purise ‘‘ko tvaṃ, kuto vā āgato, kuhiṃ vā gacchasi, kiṃ vā te hatthe’’ti na vīmaṃsati. Na hi tassa te bhārā, dvārappattaṃ dvārappattaṃyeva pana vīmaṃsati, evameva imassa bhikkhuno antopaviṭṭhavātā ca bahinikkhantavātā ca na bhārā honti, dvārappattā dvārappattāyeva bhārāti ayaṃ dovārikūpamā.
227 而应从一开始就这样了解。因为这样说——显示巴利原文
pana ādito paṭṭhāya evaṃ veditabbā. Vuttañhetaṃ –
「相、吸入与呼出,非一质多之所缘;
若不知此三法,修习便不可得。」
「相、吸入与呼出,不是同一质多的所缘;
若知此三法,修习便可得。」(《无碍解道》1.159)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Nimittaṃ assāsapassāsā, anārammaṇamekacittassa; Ajānato ca tayo dhamme, bhāvanā nupalabbhati. ‘‘Nimittaṃ assāsapassāsā, anārammaṇamekacittassa; Jānato ca tayo dhamme, bhāvanā upalabbhatī’’ti. (paṭi. ma. 1.159);
'这三法如何不是同一心的所缘,这三法也不是未被了知的,心也不去散乱,精勤得以明了,加行得以成就,殊胜得以证得?譬如一棵树放在平坦的地面上,有人用锯子去锯它。那人只依触到树木的锯齿而现起其念,他不去作意那来去的锯齿,但那来去的锯齿也不是未被了知的,精勤得以明了,加行得以成就,殊胜得以证得。'显示巴利原文
‘‘Kathaṃ ime tayo dhammā ekacittassa ārammaṇā na honti, na cime tayo dhammā aviditā honti, na ca cittaṃ vikkhepaṃ gacchati, padhānañca paññāyati, payogañca sādheti, visesamadhi gacchati? Seyyathāpi rukkho same bhūmibhāge nikkhitto, tamenaṃ puriso kakacena chindeyya. Rukkhe phuṭṭhakakacadantānaṃ vasena purisassa sati upaṭṭhitā hoti, na āgate vā gate vā kakacadante manasi karoti, na āgatā vā gatā vā kakacadantā aviditā honti, padhānañca paññāyati, payogañca sādheti, visesamadhigacchati.
'如同树木放置在平坦的地面上,这就是所系之相。如同锯齿,这就是吸入与呼出。如同那人依触到树木的锯齿而念得以现起,不作意来去的锯齿,而来去的锯齿也并非未被了知,精勤得以明了,加行得以成就,殊胜得以证得;同样地,比丘在鼻端或口相建立念后而坐,不作意来去的吸入与呼出,而来去的吸入与呼出也并非未被了知,精勤得以明了,加行得以成就,殊胜得以证得。'显示巴利原文
‘‘Yathā rukkho same bhūmibhāge nikkhitto, evaṃ upanibandhanānimittaṃ. Yathā kakacadantā, evaṃ assāsapassāsā. Yathā rukkhe phuṭṭhakakacadantānaṃ vasena purisassa sati upaṭṭhitā hoti, na āgate vā gate vā kakacadante manasi karoti, na āgatā vā gatā vā kakacadantā aviditā honti, padhānañca paññāyati, payogañca sādheti, visesamadhigacchati, evameva bhikkhu nāsikagge vā mukhanimitte vā satiṃ upaṭṭhapetvā nisinno hoti, na āgate vā gate vā assāsapassāse manasi karoti, na ca āgatā vā gatā vā assāsapassāsā aviditā honti, padhānañca paññāyati, payogañca sādheti, visesamadhigacchati.
'精勤是什么?已发精进者的身与心都成为堪任,这就是精勤。加行是什么?已发精进者的随烦恼被舍断,寻得以止息,这就是加行。殊胜是什么?已发精进者的结被舍断,随眠被根除,这就是殊胜。如此,这三法不是同一心的所缘,但这三法也并非未被了知,心也不趋于散乱,精勤得以明了,加行得以成就,殊胜得以证得。'显示巴利原文
‘‘Padhānanti katamaṃ ? Āraddhavīriyassa kāyopi cittampi kammaniyaṃ hoti, idaṃ padhānaṃ. Katamo ? Āraddhavīriyassa upakkilesā pahīyanti, vitakkā vūpasamanti, ayaṃ payogo. Katamo ? Āraddhavīriyassa saṃyojanā pahīyanti, anusayā byantī honti, ayaṃ viseso. Evaṃ ime tayo dhammā ekacittassa ārammaṇā na honti, na cime tayo dhammā aviditā honti, na ca cittaṃ vikkhepaṃ gacchati, padhānañca paññāyati, payogañca sādheti, visesamadhigacchati (paṭi. ma. 1.159).
「若有人于入出息念,圆满而善修习,
次第熏修如佛所教;」
他照耀此世间,犹如离云之月天子。」(《无碍解道》1.160)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Ānāpānassati yassa, paripuṇṇā subhāvitā; Anupubbaṃ paricitā, yathā buddhena desitā; So imaṃ lokaṃ pabhāseti, abbhā muttova candimā’’ti. (paṭi. ma. 1.160);
这是锯子的比喻。但在这里,我们应当明白它的目的只是:不要刻意去注意呼吸的来去。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ kakacūpamā. Idha panassa āgatāgatavasena amanasikāramattameva payojananti veditabbaṃ.
228 修习这个业处的人,有的不久就会生起相,并且成就了以其余禅支庄严的、称为安止的确立。然而有的人,自从用数息的方法来作意以来,因为粗的出入息逐渐止息了,身体的不安也得以寂止,身心都变得轻安,身体就像跃入空中一样轻快。好比一个身体燥热的人,坐在床上或椅子上时,床椅会弯曲并发出轧轧的响声,还会把铺在上面的垫褥弄出皱褶;如果是一个身体没有燥热的人坐在床椅上,床椅就不会弯曲,也不会发出轧轧的响声,铺的垫褥也不会起皱褶,反而像是塞满了兜罗绵的床椅一样。为什么呢?因为身体没有燥热,所以轻安。同样的道理,自从用数息的方法来作意以来,因为粗的出入息逐渐止息了,身体的不安也得以寂止,身心都变得轻安,身体就像跃入空中一样轻快。显示巴利原文
Idaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ manasikaroto kassaci na cireneva nimittañca uppajjati, avasesajhānaṅgapaṭimaṇḍitā appanāsaṅkhātā ṭhapanā ca sampajjati. Kassaci pana gaṇanāvaseneva manasikārakālato pabhuti anukkamato oḷārikaassāsapassāsanirodhavasena kāyadarathe vūpasante kāyopi cittampi lahukaṃ hoti, sarīraṃ ākāse laṅghanākārappattaṃ viya hoti. Yathā sāraddhakāyassa mañce vā pīṭhe vā nisīdato mañcapīṭhaṃ onamati, vikūjati, paccattharaṇaṃ valiṃ gaṇhāti. Asāraddhakāyassa pana nisīdato neva mañcapīṭhaṃ onamati, na vikūjati, na paccattharaṇaṃ valiṃ gaṇhāti, tūlapicupūritaṃ viya mañcapīṭhaṃ hoti. Kasmā? Yasmā asāraddho kāyo lahuko hoti. Evameva gaṇanāvasena manasikārakālato pabhuti anukkamato oḷārikaassāsapassāsanirodhavasena kāyadarathe vūpasante kāyopi cittampi lahukaṃ hoti, sarīraṃ ākāse laṅghanākārappattaṃ viya hoti.
当他的粗的入出息止息时,心就会以细的入出息相为所缘而转起。当那个细的也止息时,心便会依次以更细、更细的相为所缘而转起。具体是怎样的呢?譬如有人用大铜棒敲击铜器,一敲之下生起很大的声音,他的心便以粗的声音为所缘而转起;当粗的声音止息后,随后心便以细的声音相为所缘;当那个也止息时,心便依次以更细、更细的声音相为所缘而转起。应当这样来理解。这也正如经文所说:‘譬如敲击铜器时’(《无碍解道》1.171)等详细说明。显示巴利原文
Tassa oḷārike assāsapassāse niruddhe sukhumassāsapassāsanimittārammaṇaṃ cittaṃ pavattati. Tasmimpi niruddhe aparāparaṃ tato sukhumataraṃ sukhumataraṃ nimittārammaṇaṃ pavattatiyeva. Kathaṃ? Yathā puriso mahatiyā lohasalākāya kaṃsathālaṃ ākoṭeyya, ekappahārena mahāsaddo uppajjeyya, tassa oḷārikasaddārammaṇaṃ cittaṃ pavatteyya. Niruddhe oḷārike sadde atha pacchā sukhumasaddanimittārammaṇaṃ, tasmimpi niruddhe aparāparaṃ tato sukhumataraṃ sukhumataraṃ saddanimittārammaṇaṃ pavattateva, evanti veditabbaṃ. Vuttampicetaṃ – ‘‘seyyathāpi kaṃse ākoṭite’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.171) vitthāro.
229 正如其他业处越往上修习就越明显,这个业处却不是这样。这个业处对于越往上修习的人,反而越趋于微细,甚至不现起了。当它这样不现起时,那位比丘不应该从座位上起来,拍打皮革垫子就离去。那应该怎么办呢?不应该起座而想:‘我要去问老师。’或者想:‘我的业处现在失去了。’因为如果改变威仪而离去,业处就会变成全新的。因此,应该保持原来的威仪,从原先触息的地方把它找回来。显示巴利原文
Yathā hi aññāni kammaṭṭhānāni uparūpari vibhūtāni honti, na tathā idaṃ. Idaṃ pana uparūpari bhāventassa sukhumattaṃ gacchati, upaṭṭhānampi na upagacchati, evaṃ anupaṭṭhahante pana tasmiṃ tena bhikkhunā uṭṭhāyāsanā cammakhaṇḍaṃ papphoṭetvā na gantabbaṃ. Kiṃ kātabbaṃ? ‘‘Ācariyaṃ pucchissāmī’’ti vā, ‘‘naṭṭhaṃ dāni me kammaṭṭhāna’’nti vā na vuṭṭhātabbaṃ. Iriyāpathaṃ vikopetvā gacchato hi kammaṭṭhānaṃ navanavameva hoti. Tasmā yathānisinneneva desato āharitabbaṃ.
在这里,取回的方法是:那位比丘知道业处不现起后,应该这样思惟:‘这些入息出息存在于哪些地方?不存在于哪些地方?或者说,存在于哪些众生?不存在于哪些众生?’当他这样思惟时,就会知道:‘这些入息出息在母胎中的胎儿没有,沉入水中的人没有,同样无想天的天人没有,死者没有,入第四禅那者没有,生于色界、无色界者没有,入灭尽定者没有。’知道后,应该这样责备自己:‘贤者,你既不在母胎中,也没有沉入水中,也不是无想者,也不是死者,也没有入第四禅那,也不是生于色界、无色界者,也没有入灭尽定。你确实有入息出息,只是因为智慧迟钝而不能把握而已。’然后,他应该把心安置在自然触击的地方来作意。因为入出息对于长鼻的人,是触击鼻孔而转起的;对于短鼻的人,是触击上唇的。因此,他应该以‘触击这个地方’来安置相。正是因为这个意义,世尊说:‘诸比丘!我不说失念、不正知的人是入出息念的修习者。’(《中部》3.149;《相应部》5.992)显示巴利原文
Tatrāyaṃ āharaṇūpāyo, tena hi bhikkhunā kammaṭṭhānassa anupaṭṭhānabhāvaṃ ñatvā iti paṭisañcikkhitabbaṃ, ime assāsapassāsā nāma kattha atthi, kattha natthi. Kassa vā atthi, kassa vā natthīti. Athevaṃ paṭisañcikkhatā ime antomātukucchiyaṃ natthi, udake nimuggānaṃ natthi, tathā asaññībhūtānaṃ, matānaṃ, catutthajjhānasamāpannānaṃ, rūpārūpabhavasamaṅgīnaṃ, nirodhasamāpannānanti ñatvā evaṃ attanāva attā paṭicodetabbo ‘‘nanu tvaṃ, paṇḍita, neva mātukucchigato, na udake nimuggo, na asaññībhūto, na mato, na catutthajjhānasamāpanno, na rūpārūpabhavasamaṅgī, na nirodhasamāpanno. Atthiyeva te assāsapassāsā, mandapaññatāya pana pariggahetuṃ na sakkosī’’ti. Athānena pakatiphuṭṭhavasena cittaṃ ṭhapetvā manasikāro pavattetabbo. Ime hi dīghanāsikassa nāsāpuṭaṃ ghaṭṭentā pavattanti. Rassanāsikassa uttaroṭṭhaṃ. Tasmānena imaṃ nāma ṭhānaṃ ghaṭṭentīti nimittaṃ ṭhapetabbaṃ. Imameva hi atthavasaṃ paṭicca vuttaṃ bhagavatā – ‘‘nāhaṃ, bhikkhave, muṭṭhasatissa asampajānassa ānāpānassatibhāvanaṃ vadāmī’’ti (ma. ni. 3.149; saṃ. ni. 5.992).
230 虽然任何业处确实都只有具念、正知的人才能成就,但作意其他业处时,所缘会变得明显。然而,这个入出息念业处是重大的,修习也是重大的,是诸佛、辟支佛、佛弟子等大士的作意境地,既不是低劣的,也不是凡庸众生所修习的。越作意,它就变得越寂静与微细。因此,在这里应当希求强有力的念与慧。显示巴利原文
Kiñcāpi hi yaṃkiñci kammaṭṭhānaṃ satassa sampajānasseva sampajjati. Ito aññaṃ pana manasikarontassa pākaṭaṃ hoti. Idaṃ pana ānāpānassatikammaṭṭhānaṃ garukaṃ garukabhāvanaṃ buddhapaccekabuddhabuddhaputtānaṃ mahāpurisānaṃyeva manasikārabhūmibhūtaṃ, na ceva ittaraṃ, na ca ittarasattasamāsevitaṃ. Yathā yathā manasi karīyati, tathā tathā santañceva hoti sukhumañca. Tasmā ettha balavatī sati ca paññā ca icchitabbā.
打个比方:缝制精细布料时,针要细,针孔更要细于针。同样,修习这如精细布料般的业处时,应该希求如针般强有力的念(正念),以及如针孔般与念相应的强有力的慧(智慧)。然而,具足这种念与慧的比丘,不应该在自然的触处(气息与鼻端接触的位置)之外去寻找那些入出息(呼吸)。显示巴利原文
Yathā hi maṭṭhasāṭakassa tunnakaraṇakāle sūcipi sukhumā icchitabbā. Sūcipāsavedhanampi tato sukhumataraṃ, evameva maṭṭhasāṭakasadisassa imassa kammaṭṭhānassa bhāvanākāle sūcipaṭibhāgā satipi, sūcipāsavedhanapaṭibhāgā taṃsampayuttā paññāpi balavatī icchitabbā. Tāhi ca pana satipaññāhi samannāgatena bhikkhunā na te assāsapassāsā aññatra pakatiphuṭṭhokāsā pariyesitabbā.
再打个比方:农夫耕作完后,解开耕牛,让它们走向牧场入口,自己坐在荫凉处休息,那些耕牛便很快跑进森林。聪明的农夫想再次捕捉它们来套轭时,不会跟着它们的足迹到森林里到处找,而是拿着绳索和刺棒,直接前往它们常聚集的浴场,或坐或躺。那些牛白天游荡后,下到浴场,沐浴、饮水后上岸站着,农夫看见后就用绳索捆绑,用刺棒驱赶带回,套上轭继续耕作。同样,那位比丘不应该在自然的触处之外去寻找那些入出息。他应当拿着念的绳索和慧的刺棒,将心安置在自然的触处,让作意运作起来。这样作意,不久那些入出息就会现起,就像牛出现在浴场一样。然后他应以念的绳索将它们捆绑,就在那同一处套上轭,用慧的刺棒驱策,持续不断地修习业处。显示巴利原文
Yathā pana kassako kasiṃ kasitvā balībadde muñcitvā gocaramukhe katvā chāyāya nisinno vissameyya, athassa te balībaddā vegena aṭaviṃ paviseyyuṃ. Yo hoti cheko kassako, so puna te gahetvā yojetukāmo na tesaṃ anupadaṃ gantvā aṭaviṃ āhiṇḍahi, atha kho rasmiñca patodañca gahetvā ujukameva tesaṃ nipātanatitthaṃ gantvā nisīdati vā nipajjati vā, atha te goṇe divasabhāgaṃ caritvā nipātanatitthaṃ otaritvā nhatvā ca pivitvā ca paccuttaritvā ṭhite disvā rasmiyā bandhitvā patodena vijjhanto ānetvā yojetvā puna kammaṃ karoti, evameva tena bhikkhunā na te assāsapassāsā aññatra pakatiphuṭṭhokāsā pariyesitabbā. Satirasmiṃ pana paññāpatodañca gahetvā pakatiphuṭṭhokāse cittaṃ ṭhapetvā manasikāro pavattetabbo. Evañhissa manasikaroto na cirasseva te upaṭṭhahanti nipātanatitthe viya goṇā. Tatonena satirasmiyā bandhitvā tasmiṃyeva ṭhāne yojetvā paññāpatodena vijjhantena punappunaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ anuyuñjitabbaṃ.
231 这样持续修习的人,不久相(禅相,禅修中出现的影像或感受)就会现起。但这并非对所有人都一样。而且,有些人说:当某人产生乐触时,相会现起得像棉絮、像木棉絮、像气流那样。显示巴利原文
Tassevamanuyuñjato na cirasseva nimittaṃ upaṭṭhāti. Taṃ panetaṃ na sabbesaṃ ekasadisaṃ hoti. Apica kho kassaci sukhasamphassaṃ uppādayamāno tūlapicu viya kappāsapicu viya vātadhārā viya ca upaṭṭhātīti ekacce āhu.
然而,对另一些人,相现起得像星形、像摩尼珠、像珍珠;对有些人,相变成粗的触感,像棉籽、像木心针;对有些人,相像长腰带、像花环、像烟焰;对有些人,相展开现起得像蜘蛛网、像云膜、像青莲花、像车轮、像月轮、像日轮。这就像许多比丘诵经后坐着,一位比丘问:'这部经对你们显现为什么样子?'时,一人说:'对我显现得像大山溪流。'另一人说:'对我像一列森林树木。'又一人说:'对我像一棵枝繁叶茂、果实累累的清凉树荫。'对他们而言,同一部经因想(认知、想象)的差别而显现不同。同样,这同一个业处因想的差别而显现不同。它是由想而生、以想为因、由想所造。因此应知,它之所以不同地显现,是由于想的差别。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ pana idañhi kassaci tārakarūpaṃ viya maṇiguḷikā viya muttāguḷikā viya ca, kassaci kharasamphassaṃ hutvā kappāsaṭṭhi viya dārusārasūci viya ca, kassaci dīghapāmaṅgasuttaṃ viya kusumadāmaṃ viya dhūmasikhā viya ca, kassaci vitthataṃ makkaṭakasuttaṃ viya valāhakapaṭalaṃ viya padumapupphaṃ viya rathacakkaṃ viya candamaṇḍalaṃ viya sūriyamaṇḍalaṃ viya ca upaṭṭhāti. Tañca panetaṃ yathā sambahulesu bhikkhūsu suttantaṃ sajjhāyitvā nisinnesu ekena bhikkhunā ‘‘tumhākaṃ kīdisaṃ hutvā idaṃ suttaṃ upaṭṭhātī’’ti vutte eko ‘‘mayhaṃ mahatī pabbateyyā nadī viya hutvā upaṭṭhātī’’ti āha. Aparo ‘‘mayhaṃ ekā vanarāji viya’’. Añño ‘‘mayhaṃ eko sītacchāyo sākhāsampanno phalabhārabharitarukkho viyā’’ti. Tesaṃ hi taṃ ekameva suttaṃ saññānānatāya nānato upaṭṭhāti. Evaṃ ekameva kammaṭṭhānaṃ saññānānatāya nānato upaṭṭhāti. Saññajañhi etaṃ saññānidānaṃ saññāpabhavaṃ. Tasmā saññānānatāya nānato upaṭṭhātīti veditabbaṃ.
在这里,以吸入为所缘(专注对象)的质多(心)是一种,以呼出为所缘的质多是另一种,以相为所缘的质多又是另一种。对于没有这三法的人,他的业处既不能达到安止(深定),也不能达到近行(近行定,接近安止的定);但对于具有这三法的人,他的业处才能达到近行与安止。因为曾经这样说:显示巴利原文
Ettha ca aññameva assāsārammaṇaṃ cittaṃ, aññaṃ passāsārammaṇaṃ, aññaṃ nimittārammaṇaṃ. Yassa hi ime tayo dhammā natthi, tassa kammaṭṭhānaṃ neva appanaṃ, na upacāraṃ pāpuṇāti. Yassa pana ime tayo dhammā atthi, tasseva kammaṭṭhānaṃ upacārañca appanañca pāpuṇāti. Vuttañhetaṃ –
“相与吸入、呼出,非一质多之所缘;
不知这三法的人,修习不可得。
「相、吸入、呼出,非一质多之所缘;
只有了知这三法的人,修习才可获得。」
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Nimittaṃ assāsapassāsā, anārammaṇamekacittassa; Ajānato tayo dhamme, bhāvanā nupalabbhati. ‘‘Nimittaṃ assāsapassāsā, anārammaṇamekacittassa; Jānatova tayo dhamme, bhāvanā upalabbhatī’’ti. (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.165);
232 当相这样现起时,那位比丘应前往老师处告知:'尊者,我现起了如此这般的相。'然而老师不应说'这是相'或'这不是相'。应该说'是这样的,贤友'后,告诉他'你应反复作意'。因为如果说'是相',他可能会停止修习。如果说'不是相',他可能会失望沮丧。因此,这两种话都不应说,只应让他继续作意。以上首先是依长部师的意见。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ upaṭṭhite pana nimitte tena bhikkhunā ācariyassa santikaṃ gantvā ārocetabbaṃ ‘‘mayhaṃ, bhante, evarūpaṃ nāma upaṭṭhātī’’ti. Ācariyena pana etaṃ nimittanti vā na vā nimittanti na vattabbaṃ. ‘‘Evaṃ hoti, āvuso’’ti vatvā punappunaṃ manasi karohīti vattabbo. Nimittanti hi vutte vosānaṃ āpajjeyya. Na nimittanti vutte nirāso visīdeyya. Tasmā tadubhayampi avatvā manasikāreyeva niyojetabboti. Evaṃ tāva .
但中部派的老师则说,应该这样告知禅修者:“贤友,这就是相。善人,你应该反复把心投向这个业处。”接着,他应该把心直接安放在相上。这样一来,从这以后,他的修习就是以安放的方式来进行。古人曾这样说:显示巴利原文
panāhu ‘‘nimittamidaṃ, āvuso, kammaṭṭhānaṃ punappunaṃ manasi karohi sappurisāti vattabbo’’ti. Athānena nimitteyeva cittaṃ ṭhapetabbaṃ . Evamassāyaṃ ito pabhuti ṭhapanāvasena bhāvanā hoti. Vuttañhetaṃ porāṇehi –
「将心安置于相,明辨种种行相;」
「智者于入出息,系缚自心。」
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Nimitte ṭhapayaṃ cittaṃ, nānākāraṃ vibhāvayaṃ; Dhīro assāsapassāse, sakaṃ cittaṃ nibandhatī’’ti. (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.165);
对于这位禅修者来说,从似相现起的那一刻开始,各种盖已经被镇伏,烦恼已经平息,念已经现起,心已经通过近行定而获得定力。那时,他不应从颜色上去作意那个相,也不应从特相上去观察它。而且,就像刹帝利王后怀着的转轮王胎儿,或者像农夫田里的稻谷胎一样,他应该避开住所等七种不适宜的条件,奉行那七种适宜的条件,好好地守护这个相。这样守护它之后,通过反复作意让它增长、增广,他应该成就十种安止善巧,应该运用精进平等。对于这样努力的他,按照地遍中所说的次第,在那个相中会生起四种或五种禅那。显示巴利原文
Tassevaṃ nimittupaṭṭhānato pabhuti nīvaraṇāni vikkhambhitāneva honti, kilesā sannisinnāva. Sati upaṭṭhitāyeva. Cittaṃ upacārasamādhinā samāhitameva. Athānena taṃ nimittaṃ neva vaṇṇato manasi kātabbaṃ, na lakkhaṇato paccavekkhitabbaṃ. Apica kho khattiyamahesiyā cakkavattigabbho viya kassakena sāliyavagabbho viya ca āvāsādīni satta asappāyāni vajjetvā tāneva satta sappāyāni sevantena sādhukaṃ rakkhitabbaṃ. Atha naṃ evaṃ rakkhitvā punappunaṃ manasikāravasena vuddhiṃ virūḷhiṃ gamayitvā dasavidhaṃ appanākosallaṃ sampādetabbaṃ, vīriyasamatā yojetabbā. Tassevaṃ ghaṭentassa pathavīkasiṇe vuttānukkameneva tasmiṃ nimitte catukkapañcakajjhānāni nibbattanti.
233 在这里,已经生起四种或五种禅那的比丘,如果想要以自在力来增长业处而达到圆满,就应该把那禅那以五种行相修到自在、熟练之后,去确定名色,建立起观。具体怎么做呢?他从等至出定之后,见到入出息之所以会集起,是依赖于所生起的身与心。就像铁匠的风箱被鼓动时,因为风箱、人以及人相应的努力这些条件,风才会流动;同样地,因为身与心这些条件,才会有入出息。然后他确定:入出息与身是色,心以及与心相应的各种法是名。这是此处简略的说明。详细的名色确定方法,将在后面加以说明。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ nibbattacatukkapañcakajjhāno panettha bhikkhu vasena kammaṭṭhānaṃ vaḍḍhetvā pattukāmo tadeva jhānaṃ pañcahākārehi vasippattaṃ paguṇaṃ katvā nāmarūpaṃ vavatthapetvā vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapeti. Kathaṃ? So hi samāpattito vuṭṭhāya assāsapassāsānaṃ samudayo karajakāyo ca cittañcāti passati. Yathā hi kammāragaggariyā dhamamānāya bhastañca purisassa ca tajjaṃ vāyāmaṃ paṭicca vāto sañcarati, evameva kāyañca cittañca paṭicca assāsapassāsāti. Tato assāsapassāse ca kāyañca rūpanti cittañca taṃsampayuttadhamme ca arūpanti vavatthapeti. Ayamettha saṅkhepo. Vitthārato pana nāmarūpavavatthānaṃ parato āvibhavissati.
这样确定了名色之后,他进一步去寻求名色生起的缘。寻求并见到那个缘之后,对于名色在过去、现在、未来三世的流转,他就度脱了疑惑。已经度脱疑惑的人,以聚思惟的方式把无常、苦、无我这三相应用到诸行上。在生灭随观的前分阶段,会生起光明等十种观染。他舍断这些观染之后,确定“离染的道智就是道”,舍弃对诸行生起的执取,达到坏灭随观。通过持续不断的坏灭随观,对于一切显现为坏灭的诸行,他生起厌离、离贪、解脱,依次达到四种圣道,安立于阿罗汉果,达到十九种省察智的终点,成为包括天神在内的世间最上的应供者。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ nāmarūpaṃ vavatthapetvā tassa paccayaṃ pariyesati. Pariyesanto ca naṃ disvā tīsupi addhāsu nāmarūpassa pavattiṃ ārabbha kaṅkhaṃ vitarati. Vitiṇṇakaṅkho kalāpasammasanavasena tilakkhaṇaṃ āropetvā udayabbayānupassanāya pubbabhāge uppanne obhāsādayo dasa vipassanupakkilese pahāya upakkilesavimuttaṃ paṭipadāñāṇaṃ maggoti vavatthapetvā udayaṃ pahāya bhaṅgānupassanaṃ patvā nirantaraṃ bhaṅgānupassanena vayato upaṭṭhitesu sabbasaṅkhāresu nibbindanto virajjanto vimuccanto yathākkamena cattāro ariyamagge pāpuṇitvā arahattaphale patiṭṭhāya ekūnavīsatibhedassa paccavekkhaṇāñāṇassa pariyantaṃ patto sadevakassa lokassa aggadakkhiṇeyyo hoti.
到这里,以计数为开始、以观为终点的入出息念定修习,就全部完成了。以上是从一切行相上对第一组四法的解释。显示巴利原文
Ettāvatā cassa gaṇanaṃ ādiṃ katvā vipassanāpariyosānā ānāpānassatisamādhibhāvanā samattā hotīti ayaṃ sabbākārato paṭhamacatukkavaṇṇanā.
234 然而,在其余的三组四法中,因为并没有单独的业处修习方法,所以应当通过逐句解释的方式,来这样了知它们的意义。显示巴利原文
Itaresu pana tīsu catukkesu yasmā visuṃ kammaṭṭhānabhāvanānayo nāma natthi. Tasmā anupadavaṇṇanānayeneva tesaṃ evaṃ attho veditabbo.
(五)“觉知喜”——他训练自己:“让喜被清楚地觉知、让它变得明显,我将这样吸气,我将这样呼气。”在这里,喜通过两种方式被觉知:一是从所缘(禅修的对象)而觉知,二是从不迷惑、不混乱而觉知。显示巴利原文
ti pītiṃ paṭisaṃviditaṃ karonto pākaṭaṃ karonto assasissāmi passasissāmīti sikkhati. Tattha dvīhākārehi pīti paṭisaṃviditā hoti ārammaṇato ca asammohato ca.
怎样“从所缘”而觉知喜呢?他进入带有喜的两种禅那。在他入定的那一刹那,由于获得了禅那,喜就被觉知了,因为这是从所缘而觉知的。怎样“从不痴(不迷惑)”而觉知喜呢?他进入带有喜的两种禅那之后出定,然后观察那个与禅那相应的喜,看到它正在灭尽、正在衰坏。在他这样观照的那一刹那,由于通达了无常等相,喜就被从不痴的角度觉知了。这就像《无碍解道》里说的:显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ pīti paṭisaṃviditā hoti? Sappītike dve jhāne samāpajjati. Tassa samāpattikkhaṇe jhānapaṭilābhena ārammaṇato pīti paṭisaṃviditā hoti, ārammaṇassa paṭisaṃviditattā. Kathaṃ ? Sappītike dve jhāne samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya jhānasampayuttaṃ pītiṃ khayato vayato sammasati. Tassa vipassanākkhaṇe lakkhaṇapaṭivedhena asammohato pīti paṭisaṃviditā hoti. Vuttañhetaṃ paṭisambhidāyaṃ (paṭi. ma. 1.172) –
当你用长入息的力量,清楚地知道心已经专注在一个对象上、不再散乱,这时候正念就会生起。靠着这个正念,靠着这个智慧,喜就被你觉察到了。同样地,用长出息的力量……用短入息的力量……用短出息的力量……用觉知全身而入息出息的力量……用平静身行而入息出息的力量,清楚地知道心已经专注在一个对象上、不再散乱,这时候正念就会生起。靠着这个正念,靠着这个智慧,喜就被你觉察到了。
当你在作意的时候,喜就被你觉察到了。当你在了知的时候、在看见的时候、在观察的时候、在让心稳定下来的时候、用信心去理解的时候、策励自己精进的时候、让正念现前的时候、让心得定的时候、用智慧去了知的时候、对于应该证知的对象证知的时候、对于应该遍知的对象遍知的时候、对于应该断除的对象断除的时候、对于应该修习的对象修习的时候、对于应该作证的对象作证的时候——在所有这些时候,喜都被你觉察到了。就是这样,喜被觉察到了。显示巴利原文
‘‘Dīghaṃ assāsavasena cittassa ekaggataṃ avikkhepaṃ pajānato sati upaṭṭhitā hoti. Tāya satiyā tena ñāṇena sā pīti paṭisaṃviditā hoti. Dīghaṃ passāsavasena… rassaṃ assāsavasena… rassaṃ passāsavasena… sabbakāyapaṭisaṃvedī assāsapassāsavasena… passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ assāsapassāsavasena cittassa ekaggataṃ avikkhepaṃ pajānato sati upaṭṭhitā hoti. Tāya satiyā tena ñāṇena sā pīti paṭisaṃviditā hoti. Āvajjato sā pīti paṭisaṃviditā hoti. Jānato passato paccavekkhato cittaṃ adhiṭṭhahato saddhāya adhimuccato vīriyaṃ paggaṇhato satiṃ upaṭṭhāpayato cittaṃ samādahato paññāya pajānato abhiññeyyaṃ pariññeyyaṃ pahātabbaṃ bhāvetabbaṃ sacchikātabbaṃ sacchikaroto sā pīti paṭisaṃviditā hoti. Evaṃ sā pīti paṭisaṃviditā hotī’’ti.
用这个方法,其余几个句子也应该从意义上这样去理解。不过,这里有一些差别需要注意:应该知道,“觉知乐”是依三种禅那而说的,“觉知心行”是依四种禅那而说的。“心行”指的就是受蕴和想蕴这两个蕴。在“觉知乐”这个句子中,为了显示观智的境地,《无碍解道》里说:“乐:有两种乐,身乐与心乐。”“平静心行”:就是让粗重的心行变得平静、止息,意思是让它消灭。这应该按照前面解释“身行”时所说的同样方法去详细了解。显示巴利原文
Eteneva nayena avasesapadānipi atthato veditabbāni. Idampanettha visesamattaṃ, tiṇṇaṃ jhānānaṃ vasena catunnampi vasena veditabbā. ti vedanādayo dve khandhā. Sukhapaṭisaṃvedīpade cettha vipassanābhūmidassanatthaṃ ‘‘sukhanti dve sukhāni kāyikañca sukhaṃ cetasikañcā’’ti paṭisambhidāyaṃ (paṭi. ma. 1.173) vuttaṃ. nti oḷārikaṃ oḷārikaṃ cittasaṅkhāraṃ passambhento, nirodhentoti attho. So vitthārato kāyasaṅkhāre vuttanayeneva veditabbo.
再者,在这第二组四法中,在“喜”这个句子中,是以喜为首来指代受;在“乐”这个句子中,是直接就受的自性而说;在两个“心行”的句子中,因为经典里有“想与受是心所法,这些法系属于心,是心行”这句话,所以指的是与想相应的受。应当这样理解这四法被宣说的方式。显示巴利原文
Apicettha pītipade pītisīsena vedanā vuttā. Sukhapade sarūpeneva vedanā. Dvīsu cittasaṅkhārapadesu ‘‘saññā ca vedanā ca cetasikā ete dhammā cittapaṭibaddhā cittasaṅkhārā’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.174; ma. ni. 1.463) vacanato saññāsampayuttā vedanāti evaṃ idaṃ catukkaṃ bhāsitanti veditabbaṃ.
235 在第三组四法中,也应该以四种禅那的力量来理解。“令心喜悦”:就是让心喜悦、极为喜悦、欢喜、极为欢喜,学习“我将这样吸气、我将这样呼气”。在这里,极喜悦通过两种方式产生:通过定的力量和通过观的力量。显示巴利原文
Tatiyacatukkepi catunnaṃ jhānānaṃ vasena veditabbā. nti cittaṃ modento pamodento hāsento pahāsento assasissāmi passasissāmīti sikkhati. Tattha dvīhākārehi abhippamodo hoti samādhivasena ca vipassanāvasena ca.
那么,他是怎么做的呢?他进入有喜的两种禅那。在入定的那个刹那,他用与禅那相应的喜,让心变得喜悦、极为喜悦。又是怎么做的呢?进入有喜的两种禅那之后出定,观察与禅那相应的喜是灭尽的、是坏灭的。这样,在观的那个刹那,他以与禅那相应的喜作为所缘,让心变得喜悦、极为喜悦。这样修行的人,就是所说的:“我将让心喜悦而入息、出息,我这样学习。”显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ ? Sappītike dve jhāne samāpajjati. So samāpattikkhaṇe sampayuttapītiyā cittaṃ āmodeti pamodeti. Kathaṃ ? Sappītike dve jhāne samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya jhānasampayuttapītiṃ khayato vayato sammasati. Evaṃ vipassanākkhaṇe jhānasampayuttaṃ pītiṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā cittaṃ āmodeti pamodeti. Evaṃ paṭipanno ‘‘abhippamodayaṃ cittaṃ assasissāmi passasissāmīti sikkhatī’’ti vuccati.
“让心等持,我将入息、我将出息,我这样学习”:这是说,用初禅等方式,把心平等地安放在所缘上,平等地安立。或者,证入那些禅那之后出定,观察与禅那相应的心是灭尽的、是坏灭的。在观的刹那,通过通达相而生起刹那心一境性。依靠这样生起的刹那心一境性,把心平等地安放在所缘上,平等地安立。所以经中说:“我将让心等持而入息、出息,我这样学习。”显示巴利原文
nti paṭhamajjhānādivasena ārammaṇe cittaṃ samaṃ ādahanto samaṃ ṭhapento. Tāni vā pana jhānāni samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya jhānasampayuttaṃ cittaṃ khayato vayato sampassato vipassanākkhaṇe lakkhaṇapaṭivedhena uppajjati khaṇikacittekaggatā. Evaṃ uppannāya khaṇikacittekaggatāya vasenapi ārammaṇe cittaṃ samaṃ ādahanto samaṃ ṭhapento ‘‘samādahaṃ cittaṃ assasissāmi passasissāmīti sikkhatī’’ti vuccati.
“让心解脱,我将入息、我将出息,我这样学习”:这是说,用初禅从各种盖中解脱心、让心解脱;用第二禅从寻与伺中解脱心;用第三禅从喜中解脱心;用第四禅从苦与乐中解脱心、让心解脱。或者,证入那些禅那之后出定,观察与禅那相应的心是灭尽的、是坏灭的。他在观的刹那,用无常随观从常想中解脱心,用苦随观从乐想中解脱心,用无我随观从我想中解脱心,用厌离随观从欣乐中解脱心,用离贪随观从贪中解脱心,用灭随观从集中解脱心,用舍遣随观从执取中解脱心,这样入息、出息。因此经中说:“我将让心解脱而入息、出息,我这样学习。”应当知道,这就是对第三组的解说。显示巴利原文
nti paṭhamajjhānena nīvaraṇehi cittaṃ mocento vimocento, dutiyena vitakkavicārehi, tatiyena pītiyā, catutthena sukhadukkhehi cittaṃ mocento vimocento. Tāni vā pana jhānāni samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya jhānasampayuttaṃ cittaṃ khayato vayato sammasati. So vipassanākkhaṇe aniccānupassanāya niccasaññāto cittaṃ mocento, dukkhānupassanāya sukhasaññāto, anattānupassanāya attasaññāto, nibbidānupassanāya nandito, virāgānupassanāya rāgato, nirodhānupassanāya samudayato, paṭinissaggānupassanāya ādānato cittaṃ mocento assasati ceva passasati ca. Tena vuccati ‘‘vimocayaṃ cittaṃ assasissāmi passasissāmīti sikkhatī’’ti. Evaṃ idaṃ catukkaṃ bhāsitanti veditabbaṃ.
236 但在第四组中,首先应当知道什么是无常,应当知道什么是无常性,应当知道什么是无常随观,应当知道什么是随观无常的人。显示巴利原文
Catutthacatukke pana ti ettha tāva aniccaṃ veditabbaṃ. Aniccatā veditabbā. Aniccānupassanā veditabbā. Aniccānupassī veditabbo.
这里的“无常”,就是指五蕴。为什么呢?因为五蕴的自性是生起、坏灭、变易。“无常性”,就是指那些五蕴的生起、坏灭、变易,或者说,五蕴生起之后又归于无;也就是那些五蕴不会停留在生起的状态,而是以刹那坏灭的方式破坏的意思。“无常随观”,就是依于那种无常性,对于色等诸法观察为“无常”。“随观无常者”,就是具足那种无常随观的人。因此,处于这样状态的人,在出息入息时,应当知道这里所说的“我将随观无常而出息、入息,我这样学习”。显示巴利原文
Tattha nti pañcakkhandhā. Kasmā? Uppādavayaññathattabhāvā. ti tesaṃyeva uppādavayaññathattaṃ, hutvā abhāvo vā, nibbattānaṃ tenevākārena aṭṭhatvā khaṇabhaṅgena bhedoti attho. ti tassā aniccatāya vasena rūpādīsu aniccanti anupassanā. ti tāya anupassanāya samannāgato. Tasmā evaṃbhūto assasanto passasanto ca idha ‘‘aniccānupassī assasissāmi passasissāmīti sikkhatī’’ti veditabbo.
“我学习随观离欲,我将出息,我将入息”:这句话中,有两种离欲:灭尽离欲和究竟离欲。其中,“灭尽离欲”是诸行的刹那坏灭;“究竟离欲”是涅槃。“随观离欲”,是以见到那两者——灭尽离欲与究竟离欲——为本质而生起的观与道。具足那两种随观而出息入息的人,应当知道就是“我将随观离欲而出息、入息,我这样学习”。在“随观灭”那一句里,道理也是一样的。显示巴利原文
ti ettha pana dve virāgā khayavirāgo ca accantavirāgo ca. Tattha ti saṅkhārānaṃ khaṇabhaṅgo. ti nibbānaṃ. ti tadubhayadassanavasena pavattā vipassanā ca maggo ca. Tāya duvidhāyapi anupassanāya samannāgato hutvā assasanto passasanto ca ‘‘virāgānupassī assasissāmi passasissāmīti sikkhatī’’ti veditabbo. padepi eseva nayo.
“我学习随观舍遣,我将出息,我将入息”:这句话里也有两种舍遣:遍舍舍遣和跳入舍遣。舍遣本身就是随观,所以叫“舍遣随观”。这是观与道的同义语。显示巴利原文
ti etthāpi dve paṭinissaggā pariccāgapaṭinissaggo ca pakkhandanapaṭinissaggo ca. Paṭinissaggoyeva anupassanā paṭinissaggānupassanā. Vipassanāmaggānaṃ etamadhivacanaṃ.
观(vipassanā)以彼分舍断的方式,把烦恼连同能产生五蕴的业行一起舍弃;又因为见到有为法的过患,便倾向于与它相反的涅槃而进入,所以称为“舍弃之舍遣”和“进入之舍遣”。道(magga)以正断的方式,把烦恼连同能产生五蕴的业行一起舍弃;又因为以涅槃为所缘而进入涅槃,所以也称为“舍弃之舍遣”和“进入之舍遣”。这两者也都因为随顺地一再观见各自前面的智,所以称为“随观”。具足这两种舍遣随观而出息入息的人,应该知道这就是:“我学习随观舍遣,我将出息,我将入息。”显示巴利原文
hi tadaṅgavasena saddhiṃ khandhābhisaṅkhārehi kilese pariccajati, saṅkhatadosadassanena ca tabbiparīte nibbāne tanninnatāya pakkhandatīti ceva ti ca vuccati. samucchedavasena saddhiṃ khandhābhisaṅkhārehi kilese pariccajati, ārammaṇakaraṇena ca nibbāne pakkhandatīti ceva ti ca vuccati. Ubhayampi pana purimapurimaññāṇānaṃ anuanupassanato ti vuccati. Tāya duvidhāyapi paṭinissaggānupassanāya samannāgato hutvā assasanto passasanto ca ‘‘paṭinissaggānupassī assasissāmi passasissāmīti sikkhatī’’ti veditabbo.
这第四组四法,是纯粹依观(vipassanā)而说的。而前面的三组,是依止(samatha)与观而说的。这样,应该知道依四种四法而有十六事修习入出息念。如此依十六事而修习的入出息念,有大果报、大功德。显示巴利原文
Idaṃ catutthacatukkaṃ suddhavipassanāvaseneva vuttaṃ. Purimāni pana tīṇi samathavipassanāvasena. Evaṃ catunnaṃ catukkānaṃ vasena soḷasavatthukāya ānāpānassatiyā bhāvanā veditabbā. Evaṃ soḷasavatthuvasena ca pana ayaṃ ānāpānassati mahapphalā hoti mahānisaṃsā.
237 在这里,由“诸比丘,此入出息念定,修习、多作之后,是寂静且殊胜的”等语句,应该知道它的大功德也在于寂静等状态;也应该知道它的大功德在于有能力断除寻(vitakka,思惟、寻思)。因为此入出息念定是寂静、殊胜、无杂染的乐住,所以能断除那些造成定障碍的寻所引起的心向这里那里驰散,并使心只安住于入出息这个所缘。因此说:“为了断除寻,应修习入出息念。”显示巴利原文
Tatrassa ‘‘ayampi kho, bhikkhave, ānāpānassatisamādhi bhāvito bahulīkato santo ceva paṇīto cā’’tiādivacanato santabhāvādivasenāpi mahānisaṃsatā veditabbā, vitakkupacchedasamatthatāyapi. Ayañhi santapaṇītaasecanakasukhavihārattā samādhiantarāyakarānaṃ vitakkānaṃ vasena ito cito ca cittassa vidhāvanaṃ vicchinditvā ānāpānārammaṇābhimukhameva cittaṃ karoti. Teneva vuttaṃ ‘‘ānāpānassati bhāvetabbā vitakkupacchedāyā’’ti (a. ni. 9.1).
也应该知道入出息念有大功德,因为它是圆满明解脱(vijjāvimutti)的根本。正如世尊所说:“诸比丘!入出息念已修习、已多作,则圆满四念处;四念处已修习、已多作,则圆满七觉支;七觉支已修习、已多作,则圆满明解脱。”(中部3.147)显示巴利原文
Vijjāvimuttipāripūriyā mūlabhāvenāpi cassā mahānisaṃsatā veditabbā. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā – ‘‘ānāpānassati, bhikkhave, bhāvitā bahulīkatā cattāro satipaṭṭhāne paripūreti, cattāro satipaṭṭhānā bhāvitā bahulīkatā satta bojjhaṅge paripūrenti, satta bojjhaṅgā bhāvitā bahulīkatā vijjāvimuttiṃ paripūrentī’’ti (ma. ni. 3.147).
又因为它能让最后的吸入与呼出被了知,也应该知道入出息念有大功德。正如世尊所说:“罗睺罗!当入出息念这样修习、这样多作时,那些最后的吸入与呼出,也是在被了知时而灭,不是在未被了知时而灭。”(中部2.121)显示巴利原文
Apica carimakānaṃ assāsapassāsānaṃ viditabhāvakaraṇatopissā mahānisaṃsatā veditabbā. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā – ‘‘evaṃ bhāvitāya kho, rāhula, ānāpānassatiyā evaṃ bahulīkatāya yepi te carimakā assāsapassāsā, tepi viditāva nirujjhanti, no aviditā’’ti (ma. ni. 2.121).
238 在这里,就“灭”这个字来说,有三种“最后”:有的最后、禅那的最后、死的最后。因为在各种生存状态(有)中,入息和出息只在欲界(欲有)中运行,在色界(色有)和无色界(无色有)中不运行,所以有“有的最后”这种说法。在各种禅那中,入出息在前三种禅那中运行,在第四禅那中不运行,所以有“禅那的最后”这种说法。而那些与死心之前的第十六个心识一同生起,并且与死心一同息灭的入出息,就称为“死的最后”。这里所说的“最后”,指的就是这三种情况。显示巴利原文
Tattha nirodhavasena tayo carimakā bhavacarimakā, jhānacarimakā, cuticarimakāti. Bhavesu hi kāmabhave assāsapassāsā pavattanti, rūpārūpabhavesu nappavattanti, tasmā te . Jhānesu purime jhānattaye pavattanti, catutthe nappavattanti, tasmā te . Ye pana cuticittassa purato soḷasamena cittena saddhiṃ uppajjitvā cuticittena saha nirujjhanti, ime nāma. Ime idha ‘‘carimakā’’ti adhippetā.
据说,对于专门修习这个业处的比丘,因为他已经很好地把握了入出息作为所缘(专注的对象),当他在死心之前的第十六个心识生起的那一瞬间,如果他把注意力放在入出息的生起上,它们的生起就会对他清晰地显现;如果他把注意力放在入出息的停留上,它们的停留就会对他清晰地显现;如果他把注意力放在入出息的坏灭上,它们的坏灭就会对他清晰地显现。显示巴利原文
Imaṃ kira kammaṭṭhānaṃ anuyuttassa bhikkhuno ānāpānārammaṇassa suṭṭhu pariggahitattā cuticittassa purato soḷasamassa cittassa uppādakkhaṇe uppādaṃ āvajjayato uppādopi nesaṃ pākaṭo hoti. Ṭhitiṃ āvajjayato ṭhitipi nesaṃ pākaṭā hoti. Bhaṅgaṃ āvajjayato ca bhaṅgo nesaṃ pākaṭo hoti.
修习其他业处而证得阿罗汉果的比丘,他的寿命期限有的能够确定,有的不能确定。但是,修习这十六事入出息念而证得阿罗汉果的比丘,他的寿命期限是一定能够确定的。他知道:“现在我的寿命行(维持生命的力量)还会持续这么久,不会再超过这个时间了。”随后,他会自然地完成照料身体、穿下衣、披上衣等一切日常事务,然后闭上眼睛,就像住在拘陀山精舍的帝须长老,像住在大迦兰若精舍的大帝须长老,像在“天子国”中乞食的帝须长老,以及像住在质多罗山精舍的那两位兄弟长老一样。显示巴利原文
Ito aññaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ bhāvetvā arahattaṃ pattassa bhikkhuno hi āyuantaraṃ paricchinnaṃ vā hoti aparicchinnaṃ vā. Idaṃ pana soḷasavatthukaṃ ānāpānassatiṃ bhāvetvā arahattaṃ pattassa āyuantaraṃ paricchinnameva hoti. So ‘‘ettakaṃ dāni me āyusaṅkhārā pavattissanti, na ito para’’nti ñatvā attano dhammatāya eva sarīrapaṭijaggananivāsanapārupanādīni sabbakiccāni katvā akkhīni nimīleti koṭapabbatavihāravāsītissatthero viya mahākarañjiyavihāravāsīmahātissatthero viya devaputtamahāraṭṭhe piṇḍapātikatissatthero viya cittalapabbatavihāravāsino dve bhātiyattherā viya ca.
在这里,举一个事例作为说明。据说,那两位兄弟长老中的一位,在满月布萨日诵完巴帝摩卡(戒经)后,被比丘僧团围绕着,来到自己的住处。他站在经行道上观看月光,审视了自己的寿命行后,对比丘僧团说:“你们以前见过比丘们以什么方式进入涅槃吗?”有些人回答:“我们见过他们坐在座位上进入涅槃。”另一些人回答:“我们见过他们在空中结跏趺坐进入涅槃。”长老说:“我现在要给你们看一位正在经行时进入涅槃的人。”于是,他在经行道上划了一条线,说:“我将从这条经行道的一端走到另一端再返回来;当我到达这条线的时候,我就会进入涅槃。”说完,他踏上经行道,走到了远端;返回来时,就在一只脚踏上那条线的同一刹那,进入了涅槃。显示巴利原文
Tatridaṃ ekavatthuparidīpanaṃ. Dvebhātiyattherānaṃ kireko puṇṇamuposathadivase pātimokkhaṃ osāretvā bhikkhusaṅghaparivuto attano vasanaṭṭhānaṃ gantvā caṅkame ṭhito candālokaṃ oloketvā attano āyusaṅkhāre upadhāretvā bhikkhusaṅghamāha – ‘‘tumhehi kathaṃ parinibbāyantā bhikkhū diṭṭhapubbā’’ti. Tatra keci āhaṃsu ‘‘amhehi āsane nisinnakāva parinibbāyantā diṭṭhapubbā’’ti. Keci ‘‘amhehi ākāse pallaṅkamābhujitvā nisinnakā’’ti. Thero āha – ‘‘ahaṃ dāni vo caṅkamantameva parinibbāyamānaṃ dassessāmī’’ti tato caṅkame lekhaṃ katvā ‘‘ahaṃ ito caṅkamakoṭito parakoṭiṃ gantvā nivattamāno imaṃ lekhaṃ patvāva parinibbāyissāmī’’ti vatvā caṅkamaṃ oruyha parabhāgaṃ gantvā nivattamāno ekena pādena lekhaṃ akkantakkhaṇeyeva parinibbāyi.
因此,智者实应不放逸,常勤修此;
如此,应常修习入出息念,其功德众多。
显示巴利原文 Tasmā have appamatto, anuyuñjetha paṇḍito; Evaṃ anekānisaṃsaṃ, ānāpānassatiṃ sadāti.
以上是入出息念的广说部分。显示巴利原文
Idaṃ ānāpānassatiyaṃ vitthārakathāmukhaṃ.
寂止随念论显示巴利原文
Upasamānussatikathā
239 想要修习在入出息念之后所宣说的寂止随念的人,应该前往独处的地方,退隐到安静的居所,随念涅槃的殊胜功德,也就是一切苦的寂止。经中这样说:“诸比丘,凡是各种法,无论是有为法还是无为法,离贪被称为其中最殊胜的,也就是:骄醉的消除、渴的调伏、依着的根除、轮转的终止、渴爱的灭尽、离贪、灭、涅槃。”显示巴利原文
Ānāpānassatiyā anantaraṃ uddiṭṭhaṃ pana upasamānussatiṃ bhāvetukāmena rahogatena paṭisallīnena – ‘‘yāvatā, bhikkhave, dhammā saṅkhatā vā asaṅkhatā vā virāgo tesaṃ dhammānaṃ aggamakkhāyati, yadidaṃ madanimmadano pipāsavinayo ālayasamugghāto vaṭṭupacchedo taṇhakkhayo virāgo nirodho nibbāna’’nti (a. ni. 4.34; itivu. 90) evaṃ sabbadukkhūpasamasaṅkhātassa nibbānassa guṇā anussaritabbā.
这段话里,“凡”是指“凡是、若干”;“法”是指具有自性的存在;“有为或无为”是指由各种条件(缘)和合、会合而造作出来的,或者不是这样造作出来的。“在这些法中,离贪被称为最殊胜”:意思是在这些有为法和无为法中,离贪被称为最先的、最殊胜的、最上的。这里的“离贪”并不仅仅是没有贪欲而已,而是特指那个无为法;在“也就是:骄醉的消除……涅槃”这一句中,它虽然被赋予了“骄醉的消除”等各种名称,但从根本上应该把它理解为离贪。因为到达了它,一切骄醉,比如慢骄、男子骄等,都被破除、消解、灭除,所以称它为“骄醉的消除”。因为到达了它,一切欲贪与渴爱都被调伏、止息,所以称它为“渴的调伏”。因为到达了它,对五欲功德的依着被彻底根除,所以称它为“依着的根除”。因为到达了它,三界的轮转被终止,所以称它为“轮转的终止”。因为到达了它,渴爱被完全灭尽、离贪而息灭,所以称它为“渴爱的灭尽、离贪、灭”。因为它已经从通常称为“缠缚”的渴爱中出离、逃脱、脱离;而渴爱因为能让后有的生命相续不断而得名,所以它被称为“涅槃”。显示巴利原文
Tattha ti yattakā. ti sabhāvā. ti saṅgamma samāgamma paccayehi katā vā akatā vā. ti tesaṃ saṅkhatāsaṅkhatadhammānaṃ virāgo aggamakkhāyati seṭṭho uttamoti vuccati. Tattha ti na rāgābhāvamattameva, atha kho nti yo so madanimmadanotiādīni nāmāni asaṅkhatadhammo labhati, so virāgoti paccetabbo. So hi yasmā tamāgamma sabbepi mānamadapurisamadādayo madā nimmadā amadā honti vinassanti, tasmā ti vuccati. Yasmā ca tamāgamma sabbāpi kāmapipāsā vinayaṃ abbhatthaṃ yāti, tasmā ti vuccati. Yasmā pana tamāgamma pañcakāmaguṇālayā samugghātaṃ gacchanti, tasmā ti vuccati. Yasmā ca tamāgamma tebhūmakaṃ vaṭṭaṃ upacchijjati, tasmā ti vuccati. Yasmā pana tamāgamma sabbaso taṇhā khayaṃ gacchati virajjati nirujjhati ca, tasmā ti vuccati. Yasmā panesa catasso yoniyo pañca gatiyo satta viññāṇaṭṭhitiyo nava ca sattāvāse aparāparabhāvāya vinanato ābandhanato saṃsibbanato nti laddhavohārāya taṇhāya nikkhanto nissaṭo visaṃyutto, tasmā nti vuccatīti.
就这样,应该以“粉碎骄慢”等功德,来随念被称为涅槃的寂止。或者,也可以根据世尊在其他经典中所说的寂止功德来随念,比如:“诸比丘,我将为你们开示无为……我将为你们开示谛……彼岸……极难见……不老……坚固……无戏论……不死……安稳……平安……稀有……无伤……无恼……清净……洲……庇护所……洞窟”等等。显示巴利原文
Evametesaṃ madanimmadanatādīnaṃ guṇānaṃ vasena nibbānasaṅkhāto upasamo anussaritabbo. Ye vā panaññepi bhagavatā – ‘‘asaṅkhatañca vo, bhikkhave, desessāmi… saccañca… pārañca… sududdasañca… ajarañca… dhuvañca… nippapañcañca… amatañca… sivañca… khemañca… abbhutañca… anītikañca… abyābajjhañca… visuddhiñca… dīpañca… tāṇañca … leṇañca vo, bhikkhave, desessāmī’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 4.366) suttesu upasamaguṇā vuttā, tesampi vasena anussaritabboyeva.
当他这样以“粉碎骄慢”等功德随念寂止时,他的心不被贪所缠缚,不被嗔所缠缚,不被痴所缠缚;那时,他的心缘于寂止而变得正直。因此,就像在佛随念等方法中所说的那样,镇伏了诸盖之后,诸禅支在一个心识刹那中生起。但是,由于寂止的功德非常深奥,或者由于他正在致力于随念种种功德,这种禅那只达到近行定,没有达到安止定。而这种禅那本身也称为“寂止随念”,因为它是由随念寂止的功德而生起的。显示巴利原文
Tassevaṃ madanimmadanatādiguṇavasena upasamaṃ anussarato neva tasmiṃ samaye rāgapariyuṭṭhitaṃ cittaṃ hoti, na dosa… na mohapariyuṭṭhitaṃ cittaṃ hoti. Ujugatamevassa tasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ hoti ārabbhāti buddhānussatiādīsu vuttanayeneva vikkhambhitanīvaraṇassa ekakkhaṇe jhānaṅgāni uppajjanti. Upasamaguṇānaṃ pana gambhīratāya nānappakāraguṇānussaraṇādhimuttatāya vā appanaṃ appatvā upacārappattameva jhānaṃ hoti . Tadetamupasamaguṇānussaraṇavasena upasamānussaticceva saṅkhyaṃ gacchati.
如同六随念一样,这寂止随念也只有圣弟子才能成就。即便如此,尊重寂止的凡夫也应该作意修习。因为即使只是通过听闻,心也会对寂止产生净信。而且,精勤修习这寂止随念的比丘,安乐而眠,安乐而醒,诸根寂静,心意寂静,具足惭愧与信乐,志向殊胜,被同梵行者们所尊重恭敬。如果未能证得更上的道果,来世也会投生善趣。显示巴利原文
Cha anussatiyo viya ca ayampi ariyasāvakasseva ijjhati, evaṃ santepi upasamagarukena puthujjanenāpi manasi kātabbā. Sutavasenāpi hi upasame cittaṃ pasīdati. Imañca pana upasamānussatiṃ anuyutto bhikkhu sukhaṃ supati, sukhaṃ paṭibujjhati, santindriyo hoti santamānaso hirottappasamannāgato pāsādiko paṇītādhimuttiko sabrahmacārīnaṃ garu ca bhāvanīyo ca. Uttari appaṭivijjhanto pana sugatiparāyano hoti.
因此,明智者确实不放逸,应当修习;
对具有如此众多利益的圣寂止之念,
显示巴利原文 Tasmā have appamatto, bhāvayetha vicakkhaṇo; Evaṃ anekānisaṃsaṃ, ariye upasame satinti.
这是寂止随念详论一门。显示巴利原文
Idaṃ upasamānussatiyaṃ vitthārakathāmukhaṃ.